front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Mark\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–13)\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n * Becoming more popular among the people (3:7–5:43)\n * Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1–8:26)\n3. Progress toward Jerusalem; Jesus repeatedly predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27–10:52)\n4. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)\n5. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1–16:8)\n\n### What is the book of Mark about?\n\nThe Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the Gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his lifetime. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n### Who wrote the book of Mark?\n\nThe book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?\n\nThe people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in ways similar to the ways other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. Jesus often taught by telling parables, stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What are the Synoptic Gospels?\n\nThe Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”\n\nThe texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.\n\n### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?\n\nIn the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:\n* The phrase “son of man” can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, a human being.\n* The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13–14. In this passage there is a person described as a “Son of Man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is different than the first because God gives this Son of Man authority forever. Therefore, the title “Son of Man” became a title for the Messiah.\n\nTranslating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.\n\n### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?\n\nThe Gospel of Mark uses the word “immedia
1:intro c6ep 0 # Mark 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–13)\n * Opening (1:1–3)\n * The ministry of John the Baptist (1:4–8)\n * Jesus is baptized and tempted (1:9–13)\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n * Jesus calls four disciples (1:14–20)\n * Jesus teaches and casts out a demon (1:21–28)\n * Jesus heals Simon’s mother-in-law and many others (1:29–34)\n * Jesus teaches and heals people throughout Galilee (1:35–39)\n * Jesus heals a leper (1:40–45)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:2–3](../01/02.md), which is made up of quotations from [Malachi 3:1](../mal/03/01.md) and [Isaiah 40:3](../isa/40/03.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Baptism\n\nThe word “baptism” refers to a ritual washing, usually with water. John’s baptism is similar to Christian baptism, but it does not mean exactly the same thing (see [Acts 18:24–26](../act/18/24.md)). Mark writes that John’s baptism is “of repentance” (see [1:4](../01/04.md)). Most likely, it symbolized the removal of the sins that people were repenting of and the beginning of a new way of living. However, even Jesus received this baptism despite the fact that he did not need to repent of any sins. In this case, the baptism may symbolize complete dedication to God. Consider how you might refer to this kind of ritual washing in your language.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in speeches that John the Baptist delivers to groups of people. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are plural. You should assume forms of “you” are plural unless a note specifies that the form is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 38, 40, 41, and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
1:1-4 ewhd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ & καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ: ἰδοὺ, ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ προσώπου σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου & φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ & ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης 1 Here, the phrase **Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet** and the quotation that follows could go with: (1) verse 1: **The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God**. In this case, Mark means that the**gospel** had its **beginning** just as Isaiah prophesied. Alternate translation: “The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God, happened just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, “Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way; a voice crying out in the wilderness, ‘Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight.’” And so John came” (2) verse 4: **John came**. In this case, Mark means that **John came** as Isaiah had prophesied. Alternate translation: “This is the beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God. Just as it is written in Isaiah the prophet, “Behold, I am sending my messenger before your face, who will prepare your way; a voice crying out in the wilderness, ‘Make ready the way of the Lord; make his paths straight,’” John came”
1:1 ybv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **beginning**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Here begins the gospel”
1:1 kpq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that is about **Jesus Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of the gospel concerning Jesus Christ”
1:1 i3bc rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
1:1 et9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Many ancient manuscripts include the phrase **the Son of God**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
1:2 e3by rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 In Mark’s culture, **Just as it has been written in Isaiah the prophet** is a normal way to introduce quotations from important texts, in this case, the Old Testament books written by the prophet Malachi and by **Isaiah the prophet** (see [Malachi 3:1](../mal/03/01.md) and [Isaiah 40:3](../isa/40/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from important texts. Alternate translation: “Just as you can read in what Isaiah the prophet wrote” or “Just as it says in the Scriptures connected with Isaiah the prophet”\n
1:2 fc4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote”
1:2 z8b7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 Here, **Isaiah the prophet** represents the book written by Isaiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the scroll of Isaiah the prophet”
1:2 br10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “See” or “Pay attention”
1:2 gu7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 Here, the phrase **before your face** means before or in front of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in front of you” or “before I send you”
1:2 kl12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks of helping people to get ready for the coming of the Messiah as if it were preparing the **way** or road for the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will help people get ready for you to arrive”
1:3 cf0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche φωνὴ βοῶντος 1 The author of the quotation is using **voice** to represent a person speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person calling out” or “someone calling out”
1:3 lkm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “of one calling out in the wilderness and saying” or “of one calling out in the wilderness, declaring”
1:3 dqi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. If you do, you will need to delete the single quotation mark at the end of this quotation. Alternate translation: “the wilderness that people must make ready the way of the Lord, that they must make his paths straight”
1:3 v3n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a connecting word in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Make ready the way of the Lord, yes, make his paths straight”
1:3 peh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if people should build or maintain roads for **the Lord** to travel on as he comes to visit his people. He means that people need to be living and acting in proper ways when **the Lord** appears to his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the metaphor in simile form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Live and behave in a way that pleases God, as if you were making a road ready for him to travel on”
1:3 tz2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἑτοιμάσατε & ποιεῖτε 1 Because the person who is **crying out** is speaking to many people, the commands **Make ready** and **make** are plural.
1:4 pmse rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης, ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καὶ κηρύσσων 1 Here, the phrase translated **the one baptizing** could be: (1) a description of what John did, in parallel with the word **preaching**. Alternate translation: “John came. He was baptizing in the wilderness and preaching” (2) a title (“the Baptist”) that people called **John**. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist came in the wilderness, preaching”
1:4 je3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἐγένετο Ἰωάννης 1 This phrase introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “There was a man named John” or “A man called John appeared”
1:4 q9np rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “preaching, ‘Receive a baptism of repentance for forgiveness of sins.’”
1:4 s05n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 Here Mark implies that John was **preaching** that people should undergo **a baptism of repentance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “preaching that people should receive a baptism of repentance” or “preaching that people should ask to receive a baptism of repentance”
1:4 dtqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that people should be baptized to show that they had repented, so that their sins would be forgiven”\n
1:4 vz74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **baptism** that shows or expresses **repentance**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a baptism that expresses repentance” or “a baptism that demonstrates repentance”
1:4 p86z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, the phrase **for the forgiveness of sins** indicates the goal of the **baptism of repentance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that indicates the goal of an action. Alternate translation: “that would lead to forgiveness of sins”
1:5 cf75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα καὶ οἱ Ἱεροσολυμεῖται πάντες 1 Mark twice writes **all** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “most of the Judea region and most of the Jerusalemites”
1:5 u9yg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία χώρα 1 Here, the phrase **all the Judea region** represents the people who live in that area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the inhabitants of the Judea region”
1:5 pgyh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξεπορεύετο 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “were coming out”
1:5 b9u4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ Ἰορδάνῃ ποταμῷ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν 1 Here the people were **confessing their sins** before they **were being baptized**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements so that these events are in sequential order, or you could use another form to indicate the sequence. Alternate translation: “confessing their sins, they were being baptized by him in the Jordan River” or “were being baptized by him in the Jordan River after they confessed their sins”
1:5 h8h7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was baptizing them”
1:5 yezj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξομολογούμενοι 1 Here it is the people who are **confessing**, not John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as they confessed”
1:6 n3rk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ & ὁ Ἰωάννης 1 Here Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. The word does not introduce another event in the story. This background information is found in [1:6–8](../01/06.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Concerning this John, he”
1:6 kyy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἦν & ἐνδεδυμένος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “clothed himself with”
1:6 j141 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν & ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμήλου 1 Here Mark implies that John wore clothes made from **camel hair**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “wore clothing made from the hair of camels”
1:6 h518 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ζώνην δερματίνην 1 A **leather belt** is a thin strap made out of animal skin that holds clothing in place. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of clothing, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “an animal skin strap” or “a band made from animal skin”
1:7 p7tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
1:7 bk1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔρχεται & ὀπίσω μου 1 Here John speaks as if someone is walking behind him. He means that soon someone will continue what he has started doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will preach after I have preached”
1:7 x7iz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται 1 Here John uses the present tense to refer to something that will certainly happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will come”
1:7 g8fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **to untie the strap** of someone’s **sandals** was a duty of a slave. John means that he is not worthy to be a slave to this person who is **coming after** him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am not worthy to be the slave who, stooping down, unties the strap of his sandals” or “I am not worthy to act as his slave”
1:7 lyjx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἱκανὸς, κύψας λῦσαι 1 The expression **stooping down** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “worthy to untie”
1:7 nnbj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 In Jesus’ culture, people wore **sandals** on their feet by tying them on with a **strap**. To take off the **sandals**, someone had to **untie the strap**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what it means **to untie the strap**, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “to help him remove his sandals by untying the strap” or “to remove his sandals”
1:8 rtdf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐβάπτισα 1 Here John could be using the past tense: (1) to refer generally to how he baptizes people. Alternate translation: “always baptize” (2) to refer specifically to how he just baptized some people. Alternate translation: “I have baptized”
1:8 ghzs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμᾶς -1 Since John is speaking to many people, the word **you** is plural throughout this verse.
1:8 e4qi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Here John indicates that the one coming after him will cause people to experience **the Holy Spirit**, just as John caused people to experience **water** in baptism. If possible, preserve the baptism metaphor or express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “but he will baptize you, as it were, with the Holy Spirit” or “and he also will perform something like baptism, but he will use the Holy Spirit”
1:8 r1j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **but** introduces what the one coming after John will use for baptism in contrast to what John uses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “and, in contrast,”
1:9 u65k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 The phrase **And it happened that** marks the beginning of a new event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “Next,”
1:9 arc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Here, Matthew uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that identifies a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “during that time”
1:9 y8ea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 The phrase **those days** refers to the time period when John was preaching and baptizing people at the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it more clearly. Alternate translation: “John was preaching and baptizing people when”
1:9 zv8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
1:9 gi39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “John baptized him”
1:10 stwh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐθὺς ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, εἶδεν 1 Here, the word **immediately** indicates that as soon as John baptized Jesus, Jesus **saw the heavens being split open** as he was **coming up out of the water**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “right away, as he was coming up out of the water, he saw”
1:10 jeof rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus was in the Jordan River when he was baptized. Afterwards, he came up out of the river. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “leaving the water of the river” or “stepping out of the river”
1:10 vxaa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀναβαίνων & καταβαῖνον 1 In contexts such as these, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going up … going down”
1:10 d9zr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς, καὶ 1 Here Mark is referring to a phenomenon in which heaven and earth are connected in a special way so that someone or something can move from one place to the other. Jesus was able to see this happening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what it means for the heavens to be **split open**. Alternate translation: “he could see the heavens being split open to connect heaven and earth, and he saw” or “he saw the entrance to the heavens opening and”
1:10 n8sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the heavens splitting open” or “God splitting the heavens open”
1:10 m5f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The phrase **like a dove** could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he was **coming down** upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down on him, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down on him as a dove comes down to earth”
1:10 c7c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Here Mark implies that **the Spirit** came down from **the heavens**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “coming down on him from the heavens”
1:11 jh9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche φωνὴ ἐγένετο 1 Mark is using **voice** to represent the person who is speaking, which is God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a person spoke” or “God the Father spoke”
1:11 s6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
1:11 l2j2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱός & ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Son, whom I love”
1:11 ogiw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν σοὶ εὐδόκησα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You please me”
1:12 mh8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ εὐθὺς 1 Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”
1:12 yv6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει 1 Here Mark speaks as if **the Spirit** physically picked up Jesus and **casts him out** into the wilderness. He means that **the Spirit** compelled Jesus to go to the wilderness, although he did not force Jesus to go against his will. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “compels him to go” or “leads him out”
1:12 b3kw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “cast him out”
1:13 k2kt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Satan was tempting him”
1:14 sp0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
1:14 q12s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετὰ & τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context (see [6:17–29](../06/17.md)) that it was the soldiers of King Herod Antipas, the ruler of **Galilee**. Alternate translation: “after soldiers handed John over to the authorities” or “after the king of Galilee arrested John”
1:14 lzry rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦλθεν & εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus was going back **to Galilee**, since he had originally come from there to meet John (see [1:9](../01/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came to Galilee again” or “returned to Galilee”
1:14 ys3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
1:14 ns6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that relates to **God**. More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that came from God” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God”
1:15 rhom rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καὶ λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
1:15 fzq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς 1 When **time has been fulfilled**, that means that it is now the moment that God has appointed for something to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The time that God appointed has arrived” or “The time is right”
1:15 quab rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπλήρωται ὁ καιρὸς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The time has come” or “The time is here”
1:15 yo11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤγγικεν 1 Here Matthew uses this phrase in the sense of **near** in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “is about to begin” or “is about to happen”
1:15 gtpl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μετανοεῖτε & πιστεύετε 1 Since Jesus is speaking to many people, the commands **Repent** and **believe** are plural.
1:16 giar rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,” or “One time,”
1:16 ba2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Σίμωνα καὶ Ἀνδρέαν, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος, ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ; ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς 1 Here Mark introduces two new characters into the story. Consider how you might introduce new characters into a story, and follow that form here. You may need to rearrange some elements of the sentence to do so. Alternate translation: “two fishermen who were net-casting into the sea. They were Simon and Andrew, Simon’s brother”
1:16 cnl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τὸν ἀδελφὸν Σίμωνος 1 Mark never says whether **Simon** or **Andrew** was older, but he mentions **Simon** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **Andrew** was younger. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of Simon”
1:16 z3j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 Here Mark implies that they were **net-casting** in order to catch fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “net-casting into the sea to catch fish”
1:16 cccr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀμφιβάλλοντας ἐν 1 Some cultures use a **net** to catch fish. A **net** is a mesh or network of cords or ropes which fishermen throw into the water to trap fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to how people catch fish in your culture, or you could use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “fishing in” or “trying to catch fish in”
1:16 xor6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background γὰρ 1 Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand why **Simon and Andrew** were **net-casting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces this kind of background information. Alternate translation: “which they did because” or “since”
1:17 zui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου 1 Here, the phrase **Come after me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciples” or “Travel with me as my students”
1:17 gufa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular δεῦτε & ὑμᾶς 1 Since Jesus is speaking to Simon and Andrew, the command **Come** and the word **you** are plural.
1:17 mlc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέσθαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Jesus speaks of preaching the gospel and helping people believe in Jesus as if it were fishing. He means that, just as fishermen catch many fish, so Simon and Andrew will help many people believe. If possible, preserve the metaphor here, since it relates directly to what Simon and Andrew were doing when Jesus saw them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea as a simile. Alternate translation: “I will make you to become people who collect men for me, just as you now collect fish”
1:17 i2sr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of men and women”
1:18 tnuc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀφέντες τὰ δίκτυα 1 See how you expressed the idea of “net-casting” in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “having stopped fishing”
1:18 gvia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **they followed him** indicates that they traveled with Jesus and were his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students”
1:19 xqa0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προβὰς ὀλίγον 1 Here Mark means that Jesus walked a short distance beside the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having gone a short way along the shore”
1:19 rpej rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Ἰάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα 1 Here Mark introduces two more new characters into the story. Consider how you might introduce new characters into a story, and follow that form here. You may need to rearrange some elements of the sentence to do so. Alternate translation: “two men who were in a boat, mending their nets. They were James, the son of Zebedee, and his brother John”
1:19 iwe4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. Alternate translation: “his younger brother”
1:19 xl2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ δίκτυα 1 Translate the word **nets** as you did in [1:18](../01/18.md). Alternate translation: “the tools they used for fishing”
1:20 zjz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκάλεσεν αὐτούς 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **called them** to “come after him,” that is, to travel with him and be his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he called them to come after him” or “he called them to travel with him as his students”
1:20 b2ci ἀπῆλθον ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 See how you expressed the similar clause “they followed him” in [1:18](../01/18.md). Alternate translation: “they became his disciples” or “they traveled with him as his students”
1:20 f77b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀπῆλθον 1 Here, **they** refers to James and John. It does not refer to the servants, who stayed in the boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to James and John more directly. Alternate translation: “James and John went away”
1:21 p7ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense εἰσπορεύονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they entered”
1:21 xu4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰσπορεύονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus and the four disciples he just called to follow him: Simon, Andrew, James, and John. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples enter”
1:21 guzx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 Here Mark uses the phrase **on the Sabbaths** to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
1:22 bsc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ; ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “And he was teaching them as having authority and not as the scribes. So, they were astonished at his teaching”
1:22 mio6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “his teaching astonished them”
1:22 axno rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people who in the “synagogue” (see [1:21](../01/21.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “those who were in the synagogue were astonished”
1:22 gmpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **teaching**, you could express the same idea in another way. Mark could be focusing primarily on: (1) the way in which Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “at how he taught” (2) what Jesus taught. Alternate translation: “at what he taught”
1:22 e9gf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίαν ἔχων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “one having been authorized”
1:22 kmxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to put a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and he was not teaching them as the scribes were teaching them”
1:23 l591 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 Here Mark is introducing this **man** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man in their synagogue. He had an unclean spirit”\n
1:23 kzko rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people living in this region. Mark means that this is the same **synagogue** that Jesus was teaching in. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “that Jewish synagogue” or “that synagogue”
1:23 w7z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 Here Mark implies that an **unclean spirit**, or demon, was possessing or controlling this **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a demon-possessed man” or “a man controlled by an unclean spirit”
1:24 edx0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he asked”
1:24 ra8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ? 1 The demon is using the question form to confront Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth!”
1:24 jl0l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί 1 Here, the question **What to us and to you** asks whether **you** and **us** have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and we have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with us”
1:24 qsig rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς 1 In both places, the pronoun **us** could refer to: (1) the demon and other demons like it. Alternate translation: “to us demons … all of us demons” (2) the multiple demons controlling the man. Alternate translation: “to us who control this man … us who control this man”
1:24 m8gz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς? 1 This sentence could be: (1) a rhetorical question. In this case, the demon uses the question form to indicate what it thinks Jesus has **come** to do. Alternate translation: “I know that you have come to destroy us!” or “You have come to destroy us.” (2) a true question. In this case, the demon is asking Jesus whether his mission includes destroying the demons. Alternate translation: “Tell me, have you come to destroy us?”
1:24 xscp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ Ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the demon could be using the possessive form to describe a **Holy One**: (1) whom **God** has made holy in a special way. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has made holy in a special way” (2) whom **God** sent. Alternate translation: “the Holy One from God” or “the Holy One whom God sent”
1:25 dgy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he commanded”
1:25 hs43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φιμώθητι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Stop speaking” or “Keep quiet”
1:25 gdm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus is commanding the demon to stop possessing or controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “stop controlling him” or “cease possessing him”
1:26 bpii rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σπαράξαν αὐτὸν 1 Here Mark is referring to a fit or seizure in which a person cannot control his or her body, which shakes violently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having caused him to have a seizure”
1:26 hvbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom φωνῆσαν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 Here, the phrase **cried out with a loud voice** means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”\n
1:26 uuiv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξῆλθεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:25](../01/25.md). Alternate translation: “stopped controlling him” or “ceased possessing him”
1:27 oi1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐθαμβήθησαν ἅπαντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what Jesus did and taught. Alternate translation: “what they saw and heard amazed all of them”
1:27 miqc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντας 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they asked”
1:27 z90b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν τοῦτο? 1 The people in the synagogue are using the question form to express their surprise and amazement. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We are impressed.” or “This is amazing!”
1:27 ahqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διδαχὴ καινή κατ’ ἐξουσίαν! καὶ τοῖς πνεύμασι τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις ἐπιτάσσει 1 Here, the phrase **according to authority** could go with: (1) **A new teaching**. Alternate translation: “A new teaching, one according to authority! And he commands the unclean spirits” (2) **And he commands the unclean spirits**. Alternate translation: “A new teaching! According to authority he commands even the unclean spirits”
1:27 zuvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατ’ ἐξουσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from one having been authorized” or “that sounds authoritative”
1:28 pzq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 This sentence marks the end of this story by describing how people in the area responded. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. Alternate translation: “After that, the hearing of him immediately went out everywhere into the whole surrounding region of Galilee”
1:28 hrbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς 1 Mark speaks of **the hearing of him** as if it were something that could go out actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people immediately spread the hearing of him”
1:28 kv2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came out”
1:28 mpzh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe what people were **hearing** about **Jesus**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what people were hearing about Jesus” or “the news about him”
1:28 lomb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 Here, Mark could be using the possessive form to describe a **surrounding region** that is: (1) the region of **Galilee**. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding region, which is Galilee” (2) the area within **Galilee** that is near Capernaum. Alternate translation: “all the regions of Galilee that surround Capernaum” (3) made up of the regions that border on **Galilee**. Alternate translation: “all the regions that surround Galilee”
1:29 q252 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ εὐθὺς 1 Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that”
1:29 uyuy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
1:29 jpbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦλθον εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Σίμωνος καὶ Ἀνδρέου, μετὰ Ἰακώβου καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus and his four disciples (Simon, Andrew, James, and John) together went to **the house of Simon and Andrew**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus went with Simon and Andrew into their home, and James and John went with them”
1:29 ybs7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went”
1:30 bvvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα καὶ εὐθὺς 1 Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “While all that was happening, the mother-in-law of Simon was sick with a fever and was lying down in the house. Immediately”
1:30 gwkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἡ δὲ πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα 1 Here Mark introduces **the mother-in-law of Simon** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Now the mother-in-law of Simon was in the house. She was lying down, being sick with a fever”
1:30 dxak rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship ἡ & πενθερὰ 1 The word **mother-in-law** refers to the mother of Simon’s wife. In your translation, you could use the term or expression in your own language for this relationship.
1:30 vnp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πυρέσσουσα 1 A **fever** is a symptom of an illness in which the temperature of the body temporarily increases. People with fevers feel sick and weak. If your reader would not be familiar with fevers, you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate Translation: “having a high body temperature” or “being ill with an elevated temperature”
1:30 hysq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγουσιν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people who were in the house of Simon and Andrew. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these people. Alternate translation: “some people who were in the house speak”
1:30 i5lk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they spoke”
1:31 bzd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ἤγειρεν αὐτὴν, κρατήσας τῆς χειρός 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what Jesus did before what the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “having taken hold of her hand, he raised her up”
1:31 sff6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετός 1 Here Mark speaks of **the fever** as if it were a person that **left her**. He means that she was no longer sick with the fever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “she was no longer sick with a fever” or “her fever was gone”
1:31 wi9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ πυρετός 1 See how you translated **fever** in [1:30](../01/30.md). Alternate translation: “the high body temperature” or “the elevated temperature”
1:31 i5br rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διηκόνει αὐτοῖς 1 Here Mark implies that she took food and offered it to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “she was giving them food”
1:32 h0y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
1:32 ytjq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτε ἔδυ ὁ ἥλιος 1 The implication is that the people waited until **the sun set** because that marked the end of the Sabbath, and they could then do the work of bringing the sick to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “after the sun set and the Sabbath had ended”
1:32 ph2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔφερον 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “other people were bringing”
1:32 d1i7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 Mark says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large group of”
1:32 hg82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sick people”
1:32 y4ky rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς δαιμονιζομένους 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom demons possessed”
1:33 grp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅλη ἡ πόλις 1 Here, the word **city** represents the people who lived in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone in the city”\n
1:33 pa4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὅλη 1 Mark says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “majority of”
1:33 k4dl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἦν & ἐπισυνηγμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” or “came together”
1:33 vkx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τὴν θύραν 1 Here Mark implies that **the door** is the entrance to house where Simon and Andrew lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the door of the house of Simon and Andrew” or “at the door of the house where Jesus was”
1:34 ogir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κακῶς ἔχοντας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “men and women who were ill”
1:34 a168 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐκ ἤφιεν λαλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια, ὅτι ᾔδεισαν αὐτόν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because the demons knew him, he was not permitting them to speak”
1:34 m04o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν αὐτόν 1 Here Mark implies that the **demons** knew that Jesus was the Christ, the Son of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they knew who he really was” or “they knew that he was the Christ”
1:35 mffz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρωῒ ἔννυχα λείαν 1 Here Mark is referring to a time early in morning before the sun rose. Consider how you might naturally refer to this time period in your language. Alternate translation: “early the next day, before dawn”
1:35 dmov rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξῆλθεν καὶ ἀπῆλθεν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **went out** of Simon and Andrew’s house and then **went away** from the town of Capernaum into **a desolate place**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he went out of Simon and Andrew’s house and went away from the town of Capernaum to a desolate area”
1:35 y1bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
1:36 sy21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark is referring to other people who were there with **Simon** in the house, including Andrew, James, and John and probably other people who were staying there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer more explicitly to people who were staying at the house of **Simon**. Alternate translation: “the other people staying in his house”
1:36 emic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κατεδίωξεν 1 Here Mark speaks as if **Simon and the ones with him** were hunting Jesus down or trying to capture him. He uses the word **pursued** as an overstatement to emphasize how urgently they were looking for Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “looked everywhere” or “diligently looked”
1:37 ol9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
1:37 p2s3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντες ζητοῦσίν σε 1 Here the disciples imply that they think that Jesus should come back with them to **All** the people who are **seeking** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “All are seeking you! Will you come back with us?”
1:37 o3hn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 Mark is using the adjective **All** as a noun to mean all the people in Capernaum. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “All people”
1:37 vgc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 Simon and those with him say **All** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “Very many”
1:38 eof0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
1:38 tzvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ εἰς τὰς ἐχομένας κωμοπόλεις, ἵνα καὶ ἐκεῖ κηρύξω; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ἐξῆλθον 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first clauses describe. Alternate translation: “Because I went out to preach in many places, let us go elsewhere, into the surrounding towns, so that I may preach there also”
1:38 plm9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄγωμεν ἀλλαχοῦ 1 Here Jesus implies that he will not go back to Capernaum to meet all the people who were looking for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Instead of going back to Capernaum, let us go elsewhere”
1:38 z53z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἐξῆλθον 1 Here Jesus does not start where he **went out** from. He may be referring to how he left Capernaum, or he may be referring to how he came to the world as a human being, or he may be implying to both of these meanings. If possible, do not indicate where Jesus **went out** from. Alternate translation: “I came” or “I went here”
1:38 lz0f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “I came out”
1:38 jh2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to Jesus preaching in **the surrounding towns**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to that action more directly. Alternate translation: “to do that very thing” or “to preach in many places”
1:39 pu9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἦλθεν κηρύσσων & εἰς ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. However, it was only Jesus who was **preaching** and **casting out demons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went in all Galilee, and he was preaching”
1:39 lb9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he went”
1:39 sntp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰς συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people living in **Galilee**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish synagogues” or “the synagogues in that area”\n
1:40 wryd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτὸν λεπρὸς 1 Here Mark introduces **a leper** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man who was a leper. He comes to Jesus”\n
1:40 fn8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes”
1:40 qad5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came”
1:40 kq50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction γονυπετῶν 1 In the this man’s culture, **kneeling down** before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what **kneeling down** means. Alternate translation: “prostrating himself before him” or “bowing down to him in respect”
1:40 mwv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 The man is using this statement to make a request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in request form. Alternate translation: “please make me clean”
1:40 uotm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit με καθαρίσαι 1 The man talks about becoming **clean** ceremonially, but it is implicit that he has become unclean because of his leprosy, so he is primarily asking Jesus to heal him of this disease. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to heal my disease”
1:41 l9jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having sympathized with him”
1:41 jz24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **having had compassion**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts read “having become angry.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
1:41 flc0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
1:41 qjz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θέλω 1 Here Jesus implies that he is **willing** to cleanse or heal the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I am willing to cleanse you”
1:42 lc7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπρα 1 Here, Mark speaks of the man’s **leprosy** as if it were a person who **departed from him**. He means that the man no longer had **leprosy**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his leprosy was gone” or “he was no longer a leper”
1:42 lkks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκαθερίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “he was clean” or “Jesus had made him clean”
1:43-44 iw7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events καὶ ἐμβριμησάμενος αὐτῷ, εὐθὺς ἐξέβαλεν αὐτόν & καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ, ὅρα μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς; ἀλλὰ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Jesus **strictly warned** the man using the words recorded in [1:44](../01/44.md) before he **sent him away**. It might be helpful to make it clear that Jesus **strictly warned** the man before he **sent him away**. Alternate translation: “While he was immediately sending him away, he strictly warned him by saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’” or “He immediately sent him away. Before he went, Jesus strictly warned him, saying to him, ‘See that you say nothing to anyone, but go, show yourself to the priest, and offer for your cleansing what Moses commanded, for a testimony to them.’”
1:44 p8cu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
1:44 xc4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς 1 The implication is that the man is not to tell **anyone** that Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you tell no one that I healed you”
1:44 k2e0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς 1 The words translated **nothing** and **anyone** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “you certainly do not say anything to anyone”
1:44 xhu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest for inspection if they had been unclean but were now clean. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “ask to be inspected by the priest” or “let yourself be examined by the priest”
1:44 he7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου ἃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς 1 Jesus assumes that the man will know that the law required a person who had been healed from a skin disease to make a specific sacrifice. This made the person ceremonially clean and they could participate once again in community religious activities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “offer the sacrifice that Moses commanded so that you could become ceremonially clean once again”
1:44 w6b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Here Jesus means that the man should show himself to the priest and offer the gift to prove or provide **testimony** that he had been healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for a testimony to them that you have been cleansed”
1:44 plof rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that it testifies to them”
1:44 a6tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “to people” (2) the priests specifically. Alternate translation: “to the priests”
1:45 yjjc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθὼν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
1:45 i91a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον 1 The phrases **to proclaim often** and **to report the word** mean similar things. Mark is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “to proclaim the word often” or “to report the word often”
1:45 ov5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **word** represents what the man said about how Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Jesus had done for him”
1:45 b9n2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὥστε μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πόλιν εἰσελθεῖν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **was able no longer to enter into a town openly** because people who had heard about him would crowd around him so much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that, because so many people would crowd around him, he was able no longer to enter into a town openly”
1:45 tq0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἤρχοντο 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “they were going”
1:45 z363 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 The phrase **from all sides** is an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” or “from very many places”
2:intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n * Jesus heals a paralytic (2:1–12)\n * Jesus calls Levi and dines at his house (2:13–17)\n * Jesus brings something new (2:18–22)\n * Picking heads of grain on the Sabbath (2:22–28)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Sinners”\n\nWhen Mark uses the word “sinners,” he is describing a group of people whom many Jewish religious groups would have considered to be living in ways that were improper for those who were part of God’s people. Some of these people may have committed significant sins, while others may have disagreed with many of the Jewish religious groups about how Jews could properly behave. If possible, use a word or phrase that identifies people who are not living as many religious groups think that people should live. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n### Fasting and feasting\n\nIn Jesus’ culture, people would “fast,” or abstain from eating for a period of time, in order to honor God or to repent of their sins. They would “feast,” or eat a lot of food, when they were celebrating some important event, such as a wedding. Consider how you will refer to these behaviors in [2:15–22](../02/15.md), in which Jesus feasts and teaches about why he and his disciples do not fast. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])\n\n### The Sabbath\n\nIn the law that God gave to Moses, God commanded the Israelites to rest on the seventh day, which was called the Sabbath. The Jewish religious leaders disagreed with each other about what kinds of things a person could do on the Sabbath and still rest as God had commanded. In [2:22–28](../02/22.md), the Pharisees and Jesus engage in these kinds of debates about the Sabbath. Jesus disagrees with how the Pharisees understand the Sabbath, and he argues for a different view. If your readers may not understand what the Sabbath is and why Jesus and the Pharisees are debating about it, you may need to include some information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The short parables in [2:19–22](../02/19.md)\n\nIn these verses, Jesus gives three short parables that emphasize how certain things do not go well together. Fasting does not happen during a wedding celebration. An unshrunk piece of cloth does not make a good patch for an old garment. Old wineskins do not make good containers for fresh wine that still needs to ferment. Jesus tells these parables to illustrate how his ministry and preaching do not match well with how people had previously done things. In other words, Jesus wants people to expect what he does to be new, and this may require thinking and doing many new things. You should preserve these parables, since they are not direct metaphors. If necessary, you could introduce them in such a way that your readers recognize that they are parables or illustrations. See the notes on each verse for possible translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
2:1 j6pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δι’ ἡμερῶν 1 Here, the phrase **after {some} days** indicates that the events Mark is about to narrate occurred a few, but not very many, days after the event he just narrated, the healing of the leper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that indicates that a few **days** passed between the previous event and this event. Alternate translation: “a few days later”
2:1 ir5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was people who were in **Capernaum**. Alternate translation: “the people there heard”
2:1 jmtf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐστίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he was”
2:1 afvi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Here Mark implies that this **house** was Jesus’ home while he was in Capernaum. This **house** could belong to: (1) Simon and Andrew, since he stayed at their house previously (see [1:29](../01/29.md)). Alternate translation: “in Simon and Andrew’s house” (2) Jesus and his relatives, who may have moved to Capernaum. Alternate translation: “in his house”
2:2 zja1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ 1 Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”
2:2 pv8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”\n
2:2 m8pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μηκέτι χωρεῖν 1 Here, the clause **it could no longer receive** means that the house was so full that no one else could fit inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was no space left” or “no one else could fit”
2:2 ilsu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν 1 Here Mark means that there were so many people even outside the house that no one could get near **the door**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and no one could even get to the door” or “and there was no space even at the door into the house”
2:2 zkka rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Mark is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, that Jesus preached using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
2:3 sotm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχονται φέροντες πρὸς αὐτὸν παραλυτικὸν, αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 1 Here Mark could be implying that: (1) more than four people came, but only **four** of them were carrying the paralytic. Alternate translation: “people come bringing to him a paralytic, being carried by four of them” (2) **four** people came and were carrying the paralytic. Alternate translation: “four men come bringing to him a paralytic, whom they were carrying”
2:3 h1t1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
2:3 s21g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown παραλυτικὸν 1 A **paralytic** is someone who is not able to use or control some or all of his or her arms and legs because of injury or sickness. If your readers would not be familiar with this sickness, you could use the name of something like this in your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a paralyzed person” or “a person who could not move his limbs”
2:3 k1ev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom four men were carrying”
2:3 i2wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αἰρόμενον 1 As the next verse states, the **four men** carried the **paralytic** on a “mat.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea explicit here. Alternate translation: “being carried on a mat”
2:4 gbvn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ δυνάμενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when, because of the crowd, they were not able to bring to him”
2:4 i44b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ 1 Here Mark implies that they were not able to **bring** the paralytic to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to bring the paralytic to Jesus”
2:4 v6ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι 1 In the region where Jesus lived, houses usually had flat roofs that could be reached by staircases on the outside of the houses. These roofs were usually made of wooden beams, branches, and packed dirt or clay. Here Mark describes how these people **dug** through the branches and clay to create a hole in the roof through which they could lower the paralytic on his mat. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of roof, you could use descriptive phrases, or you could use more general terms. Alternate translation: “they demolished the part of the flat roof above where he was, and having dug a hole in it, they lower” or “they cut a hole in the roof and lower through it”
2:4 rrvf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἐξορύξαντες 1 Here Mark uses the phrase **having dug {it} out** to indicate that they finished making a hole before they lowered the man down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this sequence more explicitly. Alternate translation: “once they had dug it out” or “after digging it out”
2:4 q22b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν 1 Here Mark implies that they first climbed up onto **the roof** before they **removed** it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they climbed onto the roof of the house where he was and removed it”
2:4 db7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense χαλῶσι 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they lowered”
2:4 ouxr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κράβαττον 1 A **mat** was a portable bed that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a stretcher”
2:4 b32f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ παραλυτικὸς 1 See how you translated the word **paralytic** in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “the paralyzed person” or “the person who could not move his limbs”
2:5 trg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus recognized that the friends of this paralyzed man strongly believed that he could heal him. Their actions proved that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having recognized that they were convinced that he could heal the paralytic”
2:5 u57m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how they trusted”
2:5 v1st rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
2:5 kuvm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ παραλυτικῷ 1 See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”
2:5 hzg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 Here Jesus calls the paralytic **Child** to indicate that he cares for him. The word also implies that the paralytic was younger than Jesus. The paralytic was not actually Jesus’ son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Young one”\n
2:5 lix5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφέωνται σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is Jesus. Alternate translation: “I forgive your sins”
2:6 ihb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δέ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces something that was happening while Jesus was speaking to the paralytic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happened at the same time as something that has already been narrated. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “While that was happening,”
2:6 le6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 In Mark’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **hearts** by referring to the places where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in their heads” or “within themselves”
2:7 yr5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὗτος οὕτως λαλεῖ? 1 The scribes are using the question form to show that they disapprove of how Jesus was speaking. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not right for this one to speak in this way.” or “This one should not be speaking in this way!”
2:7 fp38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 If, in your language, it would appear that the scribes were making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Only one, God, is able to forgive sins, right?” or “Who is able to forgive sins? It is only God, right?”
2:7 sj6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός? 1 The scribes is using the question form to indicate that they are confident that only God can forgive sins. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one is able to forgive sins except one, God.” or “No one can ever forgive sins except one, God!”
2:8 h3zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus knew what the scribes were thinking even though they did not say it out loud. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having known in his spirit their thoughts,”
2:8 niy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **spirit** refers to inner parts of Jesus, the parts where he thought and willed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the inner part of Jesus or to Jesus more generally. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “in himself”
2:8 sj4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense διαλογίζονται & λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were debating … said”
2:8 wga7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ταῦτα διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What you are debating in your hearts is wrong.” or “Stop debating in your hearts whether I am blaspheming!”
2:8 vfkd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular διαλογίζεσθε & ὑμῶν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the words **you** and **your** are plural.
2:8 s3m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated **hearts** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “in your heads” or “within yourselves”
2:9 wv5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει? 1 Jesus is using the question form to show the scribes which of these things is **easier** to say. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. He could mean: (1) that saying **Your sins are forgiven** is easier than saying **Get up and take up your mat and walk**. This is because it is easy to show that someone is lying when they try to heal a paralytic, but it is not easy to show that someone is lying when they claim to forgive sins. Alternate translation: “It is easier to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven,’ than to say, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk.’” (2) that both things are equally easy to say. Alternate translation: “Saying ‘Your sins are forgiven’ is just as easy as saying, ‘Get up and take up your mat and walk.’”\n
2:9 q905 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἰπεῖν τῷ παραλυτικῷ, ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ ἆρον τὸν κράβαττόν σου καὶ περιπάτει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this sentence so that there are no quotations within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to say to the paralytic that his sins are forgiven or to tell him to get up and take up his mat and walk”
2:9 r5bq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ παραλυτικῷ 1 See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”
2:9 aiif rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven your sins”
2:9 nmp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν κράβαττόν σου 1 See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “your stretcher”
2:10 cmms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a slight contrast with the comparison in the previous verse. Jesus now shows that he will both forgive and heal the paralytic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a slight contrast, or you could leave But untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” or “Leaving that aside,”
2:10 g4jn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα & εἰδῆτε ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, (λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ) 1 Here, the phrase **in order that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus **says to the paralytic** the commands that he gives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that provides the stated purpose for which a person performs an action. Alternate translation: “here is what I will do so that you might know that the Son of Man has authority on the earth to forgive sins.’ Then he says to the paralytic,”\n
2:10 jhy6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular εἰδῆτε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the scribes, the word **you** is plural.
2:10 jsyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἔχει ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, have”
2:10 uedr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίαν ἔχει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has been authorized”
2:10 m66x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
2:10 t8qy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ παραλυτικῷ 1 See how you translated the word paralytic in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “to the paralyzed person” or “to the person who could not move his limbs”
2:11 wwzh σοὶ λέγω 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell the paralytic. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “Listen to me:”
2:11 f369 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative τὸν κράβαττόν σου 1 See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “your stretcher”
2:12 la3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἠγέρθη, καὶ εὐθὺς ἄρας τὸν κράβαττον, ἐξῆλθεν 1 The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having been healed, he got up, immediately took up the mat, went out”
2:12 ki94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν κράβαττον 1 See how you translated **mat** in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the stretcher”
2:12 e0xs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
2:12 c6zx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντων & πάντας 1 In both places, Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “all the people there … all those people”
2:12 zid9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξίστασθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “marveled”
2:12 btim rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγοντας, ὅτι οὕτως οὐδέποτε εἴδομεν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying that they had never seen thus”
2:12 q3u6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντας 1 If you keep the direct quotation, consider natural ways of introducing it in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
2:13 ma6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
2:13 eaev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came out”
2:13 zecn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἤρχετο 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “was going”
2:14 xi5p rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants εἶδεν Λευεὶν τὸν τοῦ Ἁλφαίου, καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον 1 Here Mark introduces a tax collector named **Levi** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “he saw a man who was called Levi, the son of Alphaeus. Levi was sitting at the tax collector’s office”
2:14 jhhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθήμενον ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον 1 Here Mark means that Levi worked as a tax collector. He would sit at **the tax collector’s office** and make sure that people paid their taxes to the Roman empire, who had control over this area. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who worked to collect taxes for the Romans at the tax collection office”
2:14 pc9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
2:14 ekv0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀκολούθει μοι & ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **Follow me** is a command to travel with Jesus and be his disciple. Similarly, the phrase **he followed him** indicates that Levi did travel with Jesus and become his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be my disciple … he was his disciple” or “Come with me as my student … he went with him as his student”
2:15 e2bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ γίνεται 1 Here, the phrase **And it happens {that}** introduces something that happened soon after what Mark previously narrated. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces an event that came soon after the previous event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”
2:15 zafq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατακεῖσθαι 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “was sitting down to eat” or “was eating”
2:15 zqcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation that gives further information about the people who were dining with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and indeed”
2:15 l0on rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν & πολλοὶ 1 The pronoun **they** could refer to: (1) the **tax collectors and sinners** who were dining with Jesus. Alternate translation: “the tax collectors and sinners were many” (2) Jesus’**disciples**. Alternate translation: “his disciples were many”
2:15 bwv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **they were following him** indicates that these people were traveling with Jesus and were his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were his disciples” or “they were traveling with him as his students”
2:16 rwu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οἱ γραμματεῖς τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 Here, Mark is using the possessive form to describe **scribes** who were also **Pharisees**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the scribes, ones who were Pharisees” or “some scribes, who were also Pharisees”
2:16 umxd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐσθίει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he was eating”
2:16 b1bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? 1 The scribes of the Pharisees are using the question form to criticize what Jesus is doing. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “He has no reason to eat with tax collectors and sinners.” or “He should by no means eat with tax collectors and sinners!”
2:17 f6rl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
2:17 ak1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ’ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the following sentence, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you could translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor, but people who are unwell do”
2:17 c62j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness have need of a physician”
2:17 lh4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones who are sick”
2:17 re1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἦλθον 1 Here, the word **come** refers to Jesus entering this world as a human to do what God called him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I did not come to this world” or “I am not acting”
2:17 lgl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj δικαίους 1 Jesus is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun to mean righteous people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “righteous people”
2:17 ca4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners”\n
2:18 j1h2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,”
2:18 y7bm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες & καὶ 1 Here Mark introduces background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “it happened that the disciples of John and the Pharisees were fasting. And”\n
2:18 zuo4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται καὶ λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came and said”
2:18 z394 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔρχονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to some people who asked Jesus this question. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people without identifying who they are. Alternate translation: “certain people come”
2:18 nywl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταὶ Ἰωάννου καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων νηστεύουσιν, οἱ δὲ σοὶ μαθηταὶ οὐ νηστεύουσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this sentence into two sentences, one giving the reason for the question, and the other asking the question. Alternate translation: “The disciples of John and the disciples of the Pharisees fast. For what reason do your disciples not fast?”
2:19-20 l0f0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? ὅσον χρόνον ἔχουσιν τὸν νυμφίον μετ’ αὐτῶν, οὐ δύνανται νηστεύειν & ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι ὅταν ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ τότε νηστεύσουσιν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 To help the people who asked him the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers a brief illustration. He wants them to think of him as if he were a **bridegroom** and of his disciples as if they were the **sons of the bridal chamber**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that Jesus is like the **bridegroom**, and his disciples are like the the **sons of the bridal chamber**. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them, are they? As much time as they have the bridegroom with them, they are not able to fast. But days will come when the bridegroom will be taken away from them, and in those days, then they will fast. I am like the bridegroom, and my disciples are like the sons of the bridal chamber.”
2:19 eke3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to teach the people who asked him the question. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The sons of the bridal chamber are certainly not able to fast while the bridegroom is still with them.” or “The sons of bridal chamber cannot fast while the bridegroom is still with them!”
2:19 wetb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος 1 The expression **sons of** describes people who share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The groom’s attendants”\n
2:20 y79o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται & ἡμέραι ὅταν & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here Jesus is using the word **days** to refer to a particular time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar form or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a time will come when … in that time” or “there will be a time when … at that time”
2:20 vg2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ & ὁ νυμφίος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone will take the bridegroom away”
2:20 vfc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τότε & ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 The expression **in those days, then** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “in those days”
2:21 vdza rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν; εἰ δὲ μή αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ, τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον σχίσμα γίνεται. 1 To help the people who asked the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers another brief illustration. He wants them to think of the new things that he teaches and does as **a patch of unshrunk cloth** and of the current ways of doing things as if they were **an old garment**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that what Jesus does and teaches is like the **patch of unshrunk cloth**, and the normal way of doing things is like **an old garment**. Alternate translation: “no one sews a patch of unshrunk cloth on an old garment, but if not, the patch tears away from it, the new from the old, and a worse tear happens. What I say and do is like the unshrunk cloth, and the normal way of doing things is like an old garment.”\n
2:21 v6xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιράπτει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν 1 Here Jesus refers to the practice of patching a hole or tear in a **garment** by sewing or attaching a **patch** to the **garment** to cover the hole or tear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no one patches an old garment with a patch of unshrunk cloth”
2:21 vzsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ δὲ μή 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “but if someone actually did” or “but were a person to do that”
2:21 opbt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αἴρει τὸ πλήρωμα ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus implies that **the patch** will tear away when the garment is washed, because **the patch** will shrink and rip the old garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when the garment is washed, the patch shrinks and tears away from it”
2:21 m3sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ 1 Jesus is using the adjectives **new** and **old** as nouns to mean new and old cloth. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the new patch from the old garment”
2:22 q5fg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables καὶ οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς; εἰ δὲ μή ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί; ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς 1 To help the people who asked the question understand why his disciples do not fast, Jesus offers another brief illustration. He wants them to think of the new things that he teaches and does as **new wine** and of the current ways of doing things as if they were **old wineskins**. You should preserve the form of the parable, but if it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that what Jesus does and teaches is like the **new wine**, and the normal way of doing things is like **old wineskins**. Alternate translation: “And no one puts new wine into old wineskins, but if not, the wine will burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins are destroyed, but new wine into new wineskins. What I say and do is like the new wine, and the normal way of doing things is like the old wineskins.”
2:22 fk15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ δὲ μή ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Use a natural method in your language for introducing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “but if someone actually did, the wine would burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins would be destroyed” or “but were a person to do that, the wine would burst the wineskins and the wine and the wineskins would be destroyed”
2:22 alse rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ῥήξει ὁ οἶνος τοὺς ἀσκούς 1 Here Jesus implies that the new **wine**, when it ferments, will expand and burst the **wineskins**, which are old and so no longer able to stretch. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when the wine ferments, the wineskins cannot stretch and will burst”
2:22 n0iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ οἶνος ἀπόλλυται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοί 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wine and the wineskins become useless” or “this destroys the wine and the wineskins”
2:22 dgcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the verse if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but people put new wine into new wineskins”
2:23 bb93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 Here, the phrase **And it happened {that}** introduces the next event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “Sometime later,” or “One time,”
2:23 u6ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 Here Mark uses the phrase **on the Sabbaths** to indicate that this event occurred on one specific Sabbath day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on one of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
2:23 gwir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche αὐτὸν & παραπορεύεσθαι 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, was passing”\n
2:23 ko42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 The word **grainfields** refers to places where grain is grown and harvested. This grain is usually ground and made into bread. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of field, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “fields where grain is grown”
2:23 s8rg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤρξαντο ὁδὸν ποιεῖν 1 Here, the phrase **to make a way** means that the disciples were traveling or walking along. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “also began to travel along” or “started to go with him”
2:23 jya1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τίλλοντες τοὺς στάχυας 1 Here Mark implies that the disciples ate the **heads of grain** after **picking** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “picking and eating the heads of grain”
2:23 k3pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς στάχυας 1 The **heads** are the topmost part of the **grain** plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant, which are the parts that people eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the tops of the grain plants” or “the edible parts of the grain plants”
2:24 qybi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἴδε 1 Here, the word **Behold** is meant to draw the attention of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks the person to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “See” or “Listen:”
2:24 h41a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν? 1 The Pharisees are using the question form to confront Jesus about the behavior of his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “they are doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths.” or “they should certainly not be doing what is not lawful on the Sabbaths!”
2:24 ec3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποιοῦσιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν 1 The Pharisees considered even the small action of picking heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. This kind of work was prohibited on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “are they harvesting grain, which is work that is not lawful to do on the Sabbaths”
2:24 bf8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on any of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
2:25-26 g8sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ & πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς; καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσιν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to show the Pharisees that they should have learned a principle from the story about **David** that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have not understood what you have read about what David did when he had need and was hungry, he and the ones with him—how he went into the house of God in the time of Abiathar the high priest and ate the bread of the presence, which is not lawful to eat except for the priests, and he also gave to the ones being with him.”
2:25-26 jyt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε χρείαν ἔσχεν καὶ ἐπείνασεν, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ & πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐπὶ Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς; καὶ ἔδωκεν καὶ τοῖς σὺν αὐτῷ οὖσιν? 1 Here Jesus refers to a story about **David** before he became king. The current king, Saul was trying to kill David. So, David ran away to the priest who was serving God at the time, **Abiathar**. David and the men who ran away with him were very hungry, so they asked the Abiathar for food. Abiathar gave them the special bread that was laid out in God’s presence every day, and David and his men ate this bread. You can read this story in [1 Samuel 21:1–6](../1sa/21/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some extra information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Have you never read what David did when he had need and was hungry after he and the ones with him escaped from King Saul, who wanted to kill him? He visited the high priest Abiathar, went into the house of God, and ate the bread of the presence, which was not lawful to eat except for the priests. He also gave some of it to the ones being with him.”
2:25 wxd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the Pharisees, the word **you** is plural.
2:25 cjzx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρείαν ἔσχεν 1 Here Jesus is implying that David did not have everything that he needed, especially food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he had need of something to eat”
2:26 nion rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go εἰσῆλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “he came”
2:26 xeac rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses the phrase **the house of God** to refer to the tabernacle, the place where God’s presence was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” or “the sanctuary”
2:26 y57j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 The phrase **the bread of the presence** refers to loaves of bread that were placed every day on a table in the tabernacle or temple as an offering to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the bread that was presented to God” or “the bread that was placed in God’s presence every morning”
2:26 wz3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς ἱερεῖς 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “which is lawful for only the priests to eat”
2:27 fse5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο, καὶ οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον 1 Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that God set up the **Sabbath** for the sake of people. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Humans were made first, and then the Sabbath was set up because of them. It is not true that the Sabbath was set up first, and then humans were made because of it”
2:27 i374 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for man”
2:27 v3mb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὸν ἄνθρωπον & ὁ ἄνθρωπος 1 The word **man** represents men and women in general, not one particular man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people … people”
2:27 s2yd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “man was made not for the Sabbath” or “it is not that God made man for the Sabbath”
2:28 wgwu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference that Jesus draws from what he just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “In the end, then”
2:28 kq1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here Jesus speaks about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, who am the Son of Man, am”
2:28 twr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Κύριός & καὶ τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe a **Lord** who rules over **the Sabbath**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has authority over even the Sabbath” or “rules over even the Sabbath”
3:intro x969 0 # Mark 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Early ministry (1:14–3:6)\n * Healing a man on the Sabbath\n * Becoming more popular among the people (3:7–5:43)\n * Jesus ministers to many people (3:7–12)\n * Jesus appoints the twelve apostles (3:13–19)\n * Jesus and his family, part one (3:20–21)\n * Jesus and the scribes debate whether he has a demon (3:22–30)\n * Jesus and his family, part two (3:31–35)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sabbath\n\nIn this chapter, just as in chapter 2, the Pharisees and Jesus are in conflict about the Sabbath. For more information about the Sabbath, see the General Notes to chapter 2.\n\n### Blaspheming against the Spirit\n\nIn [3:29](../03/29.md), Jesus speaks about blaspheming against the Spirit. He indicates that God will forgive all kinds of sins, but he will not forgive people who blaspheme against the Holy Spirit. Jesus says these things because the Pharisees said that he cast out demons by the power of Beelzebul. Jesus implies that he actually cast out demons by the power of the Holy Spirit. So, since the Pharisees have called the Holy Spirit Beelzebul, they have blasphemed or spoken against the Spirit. Christians debate what counts as this kind of blasphemy and why God will not forgive people for it. In your translation, you should not be more specific than Jesus is. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The parable about the strong man\n\nIn [3:27](../03/27.md), Jesus describes how thieves must subdue and tie up a strong man before they can steal things from his house. Jesus does not directly state how to apply this proverb. However, most Christians think that Satan is like the strong man, and the demons that Jesus casts out are like the strong man’s things. In this case, Jesus is like the thieves who tie up the strong man. Jesus is saying that, since he can cast out demons, it proves that he has subdued and conquered Satan, just as thieves can only steal things after they have subdued the strong man. You should not include this extra information in your translation, but if it would be helpful for your readers, you could include it in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n### Jesus’ mother and brothers\n\nIn [3:31–35](../03/31.md), Jesus’ mother and brothers arrive and want to talk with Jesus. In response, Jesus says that his disciples, those who do God’s will, are his mother and brother and sister. In other words, Jesus calls his disciples, who are those who do God’s will, his family members. He means that they are as close and important to him as his own family. This is an important metaphor that appears throughout the Bible, so preserve the metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The 12 disciples\n\nThe following are the lists of the 12 disciples in Matthew, Mark, and Luke:\n\nIn [Matthew 10:2–4](../mat/10/02.md):\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn [Mark 3:16–19](../mrk/03/16.md):\n\nSimon (Peter), James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Andrew, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nIn [Luke 6:14](../luk/06/14.md):\n\nSimon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, Judas son of James, and Judas Iscariot.\n\nThese lists do not always follow the same order or use the same names for the disciples. In that culture, people often had two or three names. For example, it is likely that that Thaddaeus was also named
3:1 bm6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:1 mjfa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν εἰς συναγωγήν 1 Here Mark implies that this is a **synagogue** that Jesus has already visited, most likely the one in Capernaum (see [1:21](../01/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “again into the synagogue in Capernaum”
3:1 rn8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἦν ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 Here Mark introduces a **man** with **a withered hand** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man was in the synagogue, and he had a withered hand”
3:1 ye6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 This means that the man’s **hand** was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Use a word or phrase that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “having a shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied”
3:2 mw6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result παρετήρουν αὐτὸν, εἰ τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύσει αὐτόν, ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the last clause gives the reason for the result that the first and second clauses describe. Alternate translation: “And they wanted to accuse him. So, they were watching him closely, if he will heal him on the Sabbaths”
3:2 vr25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρετήρουν αὐτὸν & κατηγορήσωσιν 1 The pronouns **they** and **they** refer to the Pharisees who were there, as [3:6](../03/06.md) shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees were watching him closely … they might accuse”
3:2 dw2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” or “during a Sabbath day”
3:2 q35x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that they would **accuse** Jesus of breaking the Sabbath commandments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might accuse him of wrongdoing” or “they might accuse him of breaking the law of Moses”\n
3:3 ie14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
3:3 pi5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἔχοντι ξηράν 1 See how you expressed this idea in [3:1](../03/01.md).Alternate translation: “having the shriveled hand” or “whose hand was atrophied”
3:3 nm6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μέσον 1 Here, the implication is that Jesus wanted this man to stand where everyone could see him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Stand up where everyone can see you”
3:4 dujn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς & οἱ 1 Just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the pronouns **them** and **they** refer to the Pharisees who were there, as [3:6](../03/06.md) shows. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “to the Pharisees … they”
3:4 mh3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι, ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Pharisees. He knows that they would agree with what his question implies. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I know that you realize that it is lawful on the Sabbaths to do good and not to do harm; to save a life and not to kill.” or “Surely you know that it is lawful on the Sabbaths to do good and not to do harm; to save a life and not to kill!”
3:4 zvln rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς Σάββασιν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “on any of the Sabbath days” or “during a Sabbath day”
3:4 fodz ἀγαθοποιῆσαι ἢ κακοποιῆσαι 1 Alternate translation: “to help people or to hurt people”
3:4 vz6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ψυχὴν σῶσαι ἢ ἀποκτεῖναι 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “is it lawful on the Sabbaths to save a life or to kill”
3:4 nut4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ψυχὴν σῶσαι 1 Here, the phrase **save a life** refers to preventing a person from dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to rescue from death” or “to keep people from dying”
3:5 x9ln rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετ’ ὀργῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **anger**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in an angry way”
3:5 los0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνλυπούμενος ἐπὶ τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say what caused the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the hardness of their heart**. Alternate translation: “the hardness of their heart grieving him”
3:5 thek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hardness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how hard their heart was”
3:5 n4ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, Jesus is speaking of the Pharisees’ **heart** as if it were characterized by **hardness**. He means that the Pharisees are stubborn and refuse to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their stubbornness” or “their unwillingness to listen”\n
3:5 zr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “of their hearts”\n
3:5 wbjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
3:5 itqu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρα σου 1 This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “I heal you. Now stretch out your hand!”
3:5 c3qe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus restored his hand” or “his hand became healthy”
3:6 nmkb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
3:6 nvk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μετὰ τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν συμβούλιον ἐποίουν κατ’ αὐτοῦ 1 The **Herodians** were a group of people who supported the ruler Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a short phrase to describe them. Alternate translation: “were making counsel against him with people who wanted King Herod to continue to rule”\n
3:6 qu9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν συμβούλιον ἐποίουν κατ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **were making counsel with the Herodians against him** indicates that the Pharisees were working together with the Herodians to figure out ways to harm Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were making plans with the Herodians concerning Jesus” or “were coming up with ideas with the Herodians about how they could harm Jesus”
3:7-8 bi1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ πολὺ πλῆθος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἠκολούθησεν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας & καὶ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰδουμαίας, καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου, καὶ περὶ Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα; πλῆθος πολύ ἀκούοντες ὅσα ἐποίει, ἦλθον πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Here Mark twice uses the phrase **a great multitude**. He could be: (1) distinguishing between two groups, one group from Galilee who **followed** Jesus to the Sea of Galilee, and one group from all the other areas who traveled to meet Jesus by the Sea of Galilee. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to create a verse bridge for these two verses. Alternate translation: “and a great multitude followed from Galilee. And hearing how much he was doing, a great multitude from Judea and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon came to him” (2) referring twice to the same group of people, who came from all these areas. Alternate translation: “and a great multitude followed from Galilee and from Judea and from Jerusalem and from Idumea and beyond the Jordan and around Tyre and Sidon. That great multitude, hearing how much he was doing, came to him”
3:8 nibm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Here, the phrase **beyond the Jordan** refers to regions to the east of the Jordan River. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the areas on the east side of the Jordan River”
3:8 mm5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσα ἐποίει 1 Here Mark refers to the powerful and amazing things that Jesus was doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the amazing things that he was doing” or “about all the miracles he was doing”
3:8 weie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
3:9-10 ib6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν & πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐθεράπευσεν, ὥστε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [3:9](../03/09.md) and [3:10](../03/10.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why Jesus wants to get into a boat before he gives his disciples instructions about the boat. Alternate translation: “And he healed many, so that as many as had afflictions pressed against him so that they might touch him. So, because of the crowd, he spoke to his disciples so that a small boat might be ready for him, so that the crowd might not press against him”
3:9 tozr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, ‘Make sure that a small boat is waiting for me because of the crowd, so that they do not press against me.’”
3:9 lmvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πλοιάριον προσκαρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus plans to get into this **small boat** to get away from **the crowd**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a small boat might be ready for him to embark on to get away from the crowd”
3:9 zu5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ θλίβωσιν αὐτόν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus is concerned that the **crowd** will **press against him** and crush or injure him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not press against him and injure him” or “they might not hurt him”
3:10 e86s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Jesus was concerned about people pressing against him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is why Jesus wanted a boat:” or “Indeed,”
3:10 ywtb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὺς 1 Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many men and women”
3:10 qyyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἶχον μάστιγας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **afflictions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “were afflicted”
3:10 bkh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ 1 Here Mark implies that the people in the crowd **pressed** against each other, or were shoving and pushing each other, in order to get to **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “pressed against each other to reach him” or “shoved each other around”
3:10 ge71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται 1 Here Mark implies that they wanted to **touch** Jesus because they thought that touching him would heal them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that they might touch him and be healed”
3:11 ca5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ καὶ ἔκραζον λέγοντα 1 Here Mark implies that **the unclean spirits** forced the people whom they were possessing to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were making the people they possessed fall down before him and cry out, saying”
3:11 tful rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσέπιπτον αὐτῷ 1 In Mark’s culture, the phrase **falling down before him** refers to kneeling down and putting one’s face close to the ground in front of someone. This was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they were throwing themselves on the ground before him” or “they were lying down before him to show respect”
3:11 ogev rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντα 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
3:11 xf41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
3:12 w7to rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Do not make me known.’”
3:12 wypa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσιν 1 Here, the phrase **make him known** refers to telling people who Jesus was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might not say who he was” or “they might not speak about him”
3:13 zq1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:13 njw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἀναβαίνει & προσκαλεῖται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he went up … summoned”
3:13 dfy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀναβαίνει 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “comes” instead of **goes**. Alternate translation: “he comes up”
3:13 fatx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὸ ὄρος 1 Mark does not clarify what **mountain** this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain”
3:14 vjl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj δώδεκα 1 Mark is using the number **12** as a noun to mean 12 men. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “12 people”
3:14 v0y4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants οὓς καὶ ἀποστόλους ὠνόμασεν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **whom he also named apostles**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:14 ild2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὦσιν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark means that these **12** men would go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as his closest disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they might go everywhere with him” or “they might always follow him”
3:15 c2wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχειν ἐξουσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be authorized”
3:16 ndtw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα: καὶ 1 Here Mark repeats a phrase that he already used in [3:14](../03/14.md). He does not mean that Jesus **appointed the Twelve** again. Rather, he is using this phrase to introduce who these **Twelve** were. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Here are the names of the Twelve that he appointed:”
3:16 ywli rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **And he appointed the Twelve**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts do not include these words. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:16 ozli rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Mark is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun to refer to Jesus’ closest disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”\n
3:16 bt0f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 Here Mark introduces the first person in the list of **the Twelve**, and he clarifies that Jesus gave a new name to **Simon**: **Peter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates both that **Simon** is the first in the list of twelve men and that Jesus named him **Peter**. Alternate translation: “and they were Simon, to whom he added a name, Peter”
3:17 puod rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τὸν ἀδελφὸν τοῦ Ἰακώβου 1 Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James”
3:17 n1be rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Βοανηργές 1 The word **Boanerges** is a Hebrew word. Mark has spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. Since Mark states what this word means at the end of the verse, you also should spell it out the way it sounds in your language.
3:17 n4gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom υἱοὶ βροντῆς 1 The expression **Sons of** describes people who shares the qualities of something. In this case, the name indicates that James and John share the qualities of **Thunder**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “People Like Thunder” or “Thunder-Like”
3:18 bugz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Θαδδαῖον 1 The word **Thaddaeus** is the name of a man.
3:18 tgmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate τὸν Καναναῖον 1 **Cananaios** is a word borrowed from Aramaic that describes someone as a “zealot,” that is, someone who is very zealous about something. You will need to decide if you will also borrow this word into your language or if you will translate the meaning. If you borrow the word, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then put the translation in a footnote. If you translate the word’s meaning, **Cananaios** could be: (1) a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One”
3:19 r3zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 Mark writes **who also handed him over** to provide some extra information about what Judas did to Jesus later. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “who would later also hand him over”
3:20 d9uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:20 lfqz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται & συνέρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came … came together”
3:20 qy7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἔρχεται 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, comes”
3:20 whej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
3:20 jxr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἶκον 1 This is probably the same **house** that Mark mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). See how you expressed the idea there. Alternate translation: “Simon and Andrew’s house” or “his house”
3:20 v0y9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν 1 Here Mark implies that the **crowd** was so large that Jesus and his disciples did not have time, or perhaps even space, to **eat**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were so busy that they could not even eat bread” or “they had no opportunity even to eat bread”
3:20 rq6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἄρτον φαγεῖν 1 Mark is using **bread** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat anything”\n
3:21 koc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἱ παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here the phrase **the ones from him** could refer to: (1) Jesus’ relatives, most specifically his mother and brothers, who are the ones who arrive at the house in [3:31](../03/31.md). Alternate translation: “his family” (2) Jesus’ friends from his hometown, Nazareth. Alternate translation: “his friends”
3:21 ar7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν; ἔλεγον γὰρ, ὅτι ἐξέστη 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “were saying, ‘He is out of his mind.’ Therefore, they went out to seize him”
3:21 sgba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “came out”
3:21 hjdb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κρατῆσαι αὐτόν 1 Here Mark implies that **the ones from him** intend to compel Jesus to return with them in their custody or control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to take him into their custody” or “to restrain him”
3:21 vqyg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγον & ὅτι ἐξέστη 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that he was out of his mind”
3:21 uyl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔλεγον 1 The pronoun **they** could refer to: (1) **the ones from him**. Alternate translation: “the ones from him were saying” or “these ones were saying” (2) people in general. Alternate translation: “people were saying”
3:21 mf5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστη 1 Here, the clause **He is out of his mind** means that these people think that Jesus is insane, that is, acting irrationally. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” or “He is acting irrationally”
3:22 e45n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἱ γραμματεῖς, οἱ ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων καταβάντες ἔλεγον 1 Here Mark uses the phrase **having come down from Jerusalem** to distinguish these **scribes** from any other scribes. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the scribes, the ones having come down from Jerusalem, were saying”
3:22 a971 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go καταβάντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone down”
3:22 egv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγον, ὅτι Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει; καὶ, ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια 1 It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “were saying that he had Beelzebul and that by the ruler of the demons he was casting out the demons.”
3:22 prj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom Βεελζεβοὺλ ἔχει 1 Here the scribes mean that Jesus is possessed or controlled by **Beelzebul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is possessed by Beelzebul” or “Beelzebul possesses him”
3:22 mhmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων 1 Here the scribes mean that Jesus has power from **the ruler of the demons** to cast out demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “By the power of the ruler of the demons” or “As he is empowered by the ruler of the demons”
3:22 t3ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων 1 The phrase **the ruler of the demons** refers to the devil, that is, **Beelzebul**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Beelzebul, the ruler of the demons,”
3:23 iuqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the scribes and the people who were nearby. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the scribes and the rest of the people” or “the people who were nearby”
3:23 q8f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the scribes. The question shows that it does not make any sense for **Satan** to cast out **Satan**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Satan cannot cast out Satan.” or “It makes no sense for Satan to cast out Satan!”
3:23 xb13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δύναται Σατανᾶς Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλειν 1 In both places, **Satan** represents people who act by the power of **Satan**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are Satan’s followers able to cast out Satan’s followers” or “are those who act by Satan’s power able to cast out others who also act by Satan’s power”\n
3:24 j5sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη 1 To teach the people, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this illustration: If a kingdom has been divided against itself, that kingdom is not able to stand”
3:24 my56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι ἡ βασιλεία ἐκείνη 1 Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a **kingdom** were **divided against itself**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine a kingdom that has been divided against itself. That kingdom is not able to stand”
3:24 b4z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ 1 Here, the word **kingdom** represents the people who live in that kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people in one kingdom have been divided against each other”
3:24 mc3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacks itself”
3:24 k3bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται σταθῆναι 1 Here, the phrase **is not able to stand** means that the **kingdom** will not exist much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fall” or “will no longer exist”
3:25 dm6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables καὶ ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι 1 To teach the people, Jesus offers a second story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to another illustration: If a house has been divided against itself, that house will not be able to stand”
3:25 dlev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐὰν οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ, οὐ δυνήσεται ἡ οἰκία ἐκείνη σταθῆναι 1 Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if a **house** were **divided against itself**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine a house that has been divided against itself. That house will not be able to stand”
3:25 zcr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἰκία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ 1 Here, the word **house** represents the people who live in that house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people in one house have been divided against each other”
3:25 jagu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν μερισθῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacks itself”
3:25 w62b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ δυνήσεται & σταθῆναι 1 Here, the phrase **will not be able to stand** means that the **house** will not exist much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will fall” or “will no longer exist”
3:26 w7na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη, οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει 1 Here Jesus uses an imaginary situation to help explain what would happen if **Satan rose up against himself and was divided**. Use a natural method in your language for introducing an imaginary situation. Alternate translation: “imagine that Satan rose up against himself and was divided. In that case, he would not be able to stand, but he would have an end”
3:26 g3ob rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὁ Σατανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη 1 Jesus is using **Satan** to represent Satan and his demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Satan and the demons that obey him rose up against themselves and were divided”
3:26 niio rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀνέστη ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν καὶ ἐμερίσθη 1 The phrases **rose up against himself** and **was divided** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single clause. Alternate translation: “was divided against himself”
3:26 vc3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐμερίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “attacked himself”
3:26 vif7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὐ δύναται στῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέλος ἔχει 1 The clauses **he is not able to stand** and **he has an end** mean similar things. The first clause states the meaning negatively, and the second clause states the meaning positively. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second clause is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses. Alternate translation: “he is not able to stand; yes, he has an end” or “he has his end”
3:26 df2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται στῆναι 1 Here, the phrase **is not able to stand** means that **Satan** will not have authority or power much longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will no longer have power” or “he will not remain in control”
3:26 m3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τέλος ἔχει 1 Here, the word **end** refers to a time when Satan no longer has power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his rule ends” or “his authority fails”
3:27 mvr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ἀλλ’ οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς 1 To teach the people, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But listen to this story: No one is able”
3:27 rzbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what is true in contrast to the hypothetical situations he has been using to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces what is true in contrast to a hypothetical situation, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “However, as it really is,”
3:27 x9lk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐ δύναται οὐδεὶς εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ εἰσελθὼν τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “no one, unless he has first bound the strong man, is able, entering into the house of that strong man, to steal his belongings”\n
3:27 i7tr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun μὴ πρῶτον & δήσῃ & διαρπάσει 1 Although the term **he** in both these places is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that person has not first bound … that person will plunder”
3:27 o503 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει 1 Here, the word **he** refers to the person who is stealing. The word **his** refers to the strong man. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the thief will plunder the strong man’s”
3:28-29 m0s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν & ὃς δ’ ἂν βλασφημήσῃ εἰς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only sin or blasphemy that will not be forgiven the sons of men is the blasphemy against the Holy Spirit. Whoever does that” or “most sins and blasphemies, as much as they blaspheme, will be forgiven the sons of men, but the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven. Whoever has done that”
3:28 f6fq ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his audience. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the truth and importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
3:28 w02f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the crowd, the word **you** is singular.
3:28 x85u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντα ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sons of men for all the sins and the blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme”
3:28 moeq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα ἀφεθήσεται & τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν 1 Here Jesus is indicating that God forgives all kinds of **sins** and **blasphemies**, not that God will forgive every single sin or blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all sins and blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, can be forgiven” or “all kinds of sins and blasphemies, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven men”
3:28 vbwa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πάντα ἀφεθήσεται & τὰ ἁμαρτήματα καὶ αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sins** and **blasphemies**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “all sinful and blasphemous things, as much as they may blaspheme, will be forgiven” or “whenever anyone sins or blasphemes in any way, it will be forgiven”
3:28 gg74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἀφεθήσεται & αἱ βλασφημίαι, ὅσα ἐὰν βλασφημήσωσιν 1 The expression **whatever they may blaspheme** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “all the blasphemies will be forgiven”
3:28 p6sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the phrase **the sons of men** refers to people in general, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men and women” or “humans”
3:29 ips3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔχει ἄφεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “will not be forgiven”
3:29 kx41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Here, the phrase **to eternity** means that something lasts forever. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “forever”
3:29 zznr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἔνοχός & αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **guilty of an eternal sin**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “deserving of eternal judgment.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:29 xea7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αἰωνίου ἁμαρτήματος 1 Here Jesus means that the **sin** has **eternal** consequences. In other words, the person who commits this **sin** will always be guilty for it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a sin with eternal consequences” or “eternally of this sin”
3:30 yt1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **because** introduces a reason why Jesus gave the teaching that Mark quotes in [3:23–29](../03/23.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of reason. Alternate translation: “which things he said because” or “and the reason for his teaching was that”
3:30 etf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγον, πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that he had an unclean spirit”
3:30 sfa2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον ἔχει 1 Here the scribes meant that they thought that Jesus was possessed or controlled by **an unclean spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He is possessed by an unclean spirit” or “An unclean spirit possesses him”
3:31 c8oa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
3:31 gef8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 These were Jesus' younger **brothers**. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you could use it here.\n
3:31 xxfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “go”
3:31 ci25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came”
3:31 d6w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξω στήκοντες 1 Here Mark implies that they are **standing outside** the house that Jesus is in, most likely the house mentioned in [3:20](../03/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “standing outside the house” or “standing outside the place where Jesus was teaching”
3:31 pu1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν καλοῦντες αὐτόν 1 Here Mark means that Jesus’ mother and brothers sent a person to Jesus to ask him to come out and meet them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they sent a messenger to him to summon him” or “they had someone go in and tell him to come out”
3:32 n20m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου, ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they say to him that his mother and his mothers were seeking him outside”
3:32 yvek rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they said”
3:32 dkbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **Behold** is intended to draw the attention of Jesus and to ask him to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Behold** with a word or phrase that asks someone to listen or pay attention. Alternate translation: “Listen” or “Excuse me”
3:32 tivd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοί σου 1 See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md).
3:32 kucs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants οἱ ἀδελφοί σου 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **your brothers**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “your brothers and your sisters.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
3:32 lbfz ἔξω ζητοῦσίν σε 1 Alternate translation: “want to see you outside” or “are outside, and they want to talk with you”
3:33 hkij rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
3:33 qe8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Jesus is using the question form to teach his audience about whom he considers to be part of his family. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Since Jesus answers the question in [3:34–35](../03/34.md), you should not include an implied answer here. Alternate translation: “I will inform you about whom I call my mother and my brothers.” or “Let me tell you whom I love as if they were my mother or my brothers.”
3:33 j6u0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md).
3:34 ebj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
3:34 j305 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ μου 1 Here, the word **Behold** indicates that the audience should look where Jesus looked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Consider these people to be my mother” or “These are my mother”
3:34 aw65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 Here Jesus speaks of **the ones sitting in a circle around him** as if they were his **mother** and **brothers**. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile form or state the meaning of the metaphor more explicitly. Alternate translation: “those whom I call my mother and my brothers” or “the people I love as if they were my mother and my brothers”
3:34 bouy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 See how you translated **brothers** in [3:31](../03/31.md).
3:35 wmif rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation concerning why Jesus can call the people who are sitting around him his mother and brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “I say that because”
3:35 dr45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God desires”
3:35 yr9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 Here Jesus speaks of everyone who does God’s will as if they were his **brother and sister and mother**. He means that he considers them to be part of his family. Express the idea as you did in the previous verse ([3:34](../03/34.md)). Alternate translation: “I call this one my brother and sister and mother” or “this is a person whom I love as if he or she were my brother and sister and mother”\n
4:intro f5ua 0 # Mark 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Becoming more popular among the people (3:7–5:43)\n * The parable of the sower (4:1–9)\n * Jesus explains the parable of the sower (4:10–20)\n * Jesus teaches about secrets and knowledge (4:21–25)\n * The parable of the seeds growing by themselves (4:26–29)\n * The parable of the mustard seed (4:30–32)\n * Summary statement (4:33–34)\n * Jesus calms a storm (4:35–41)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:12](../04/12.md), which is a quotation from [Isaiah 6:9–10](../isa/06/09.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Farming\n\nJesus refers to several different farming practices in this chapter. In his culture, farmers often threw seeds over their fields, a process called sowing. After throwing the seeds, they would use a tool called a plow to cover the seeds with dirt. Then, they would water and take care of the seeds until they sprouted and grew. Finally, when the plants produced grain or other kinds of crops, they would cut down the plants, separate the edible parts from the inedible parts, and store the edible parts in a safe place. See the notes on the verses in which Jesus discusses farming practices for specific information and translation options.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Parables\n\nThroughout this chapter, Jesus uses several parables to teach the crowds and his disciples. Each parable is a short story that includes a specific lesson. Jesus uses parables to teach so that people who already know his message will learn more but people who do not know his message will not learn anything (see [4:11–12](../04/11.md)). Jesus explains one of the parables, but he does not explain any of the others. Possible explanations for each parable are included below, but only for help in translation. Your translation should not directly explain the meaning of any parable more than Jesus does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])\n\n* The parable of the sower—In [4:3–9](../04/03.md), Jesus tells a story about a man who sows seed and about what happens to the seed. Jesus explains this parable in [4:14–20](../04/14.md). Even with this explanation, Christians debate who the sower is, what the seed represents, and what the different areas in the field represent. The sower could be Jesus himself, God, or anyone who preaches the gospel. The seed could be the gospel or the person who hears the gospel. The different areas in the field could be regions or areas where people hear the gospel, different kinds of people, or different ways of responding to the gospel. Most likely, the seed and the area in the field together describe what happens when people respond to the gospel in these four ways.\n\n* The parable of the seeds growing by themselves—In [4:26–29](../04/26.md), Jesus tells a story about a farmer who sows seed. The seed sprouts, grows, and produces a crop all by itself, and the farmer does not know how it happens. However, when the crop is ready, he harvests it. Most likely, Jesus is describing how God’s kingdom grows and expands, even without help from people. By the time God judges everyone, which is like a harvest, the kingdom will be very large and productive, even though people do not always know how that happens.\n\n* The parable of the mustard seed—In [4:30–32](../04/30.md), Jesus tells a story about how a very small seed (a mustard seed) grows into a very large plant. Most likely, he is describing how his group of followers was very small but will eventually become very large. Jesus mentions that birds nest in the shadow of this large plant. Some people think that Jesus is referring to passages like [Ezekiel 17:23](../ezk/17/23.md), which could suggest that the birds represent Gentiles who become part of God’s kingdom. Others think tha
4:1 q0xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “One day,”
4:1 cqq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὄχλος πλεῖστος 1 Mark says **the largest crowd** here as an overstatement for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “a huge crowd” or “an enormous crowd”
4:1 ufxn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνάγεται πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered to him” or “came to listen to him”
4:1 i95e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 In Jesus’ culture, teachers usually **sat down** when they were going to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sat down on the sea to instruct them” or “sat down on the sea as a teacher does”
4:1 bzp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 Here Mark means that Jesus sat down in the boat, which was floating **on the sea**. Jesus did not sit directly on top of the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the boat as it was on the sea” or “in it”
4:2 h2a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “here is what he taught:”
4:3 vqh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων 1 To teach the people in the crowd, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: Behold, the sower went out”
4:3 gmdi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the words **Listen** and **Behold** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these words with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “Picture this:” or “Pay attention to this:”
4:3 w0ng rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων 1 Here Jesus introduces a **sower** as a character in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a sower. He went out”
4:4 xqj5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ ἐγένετο 1 Here, the phrase **And it happened that** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next action, or you could leave **And it happened that** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then,”
4:4 zc07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπείρειν 1 While there are many ways to sow or plant seeds, here Jesus is describing a practice in which farmers pick up handfuls of seed and throw them so that they are scattered all over the top of the soil. This method is a quick and easy way to plant seeds in large fields, but some seeds land on ground that is not good for them to grow in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit what kind of sowing this is. Alternate translation: “as he threw the seeds over the ground” or “as he scattered the seeds over the field”
4:4 si37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, καὶ ἦλθεν τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ κατέφαγεν αὐτό 1 Here Jesus implies that the seeds that fall **beside the road** do not sink into the ground. Instead, they just sit on top of the hard-packed dirt by the **road** and are unprotected from birds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “some fell on the hard ground beside the road, and the birds came and easily devoured them”
4:4 w50s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὃ 1 Jesus is using the adjective **some** as a noun to mean some of the seeds. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some seed”
4:4 ob8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὰ πετεινὰ 1 The phrase **the birds** represents any birds, not particular birds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “birds”
4:4 j2w9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτό 1 Here, although the pronoun **it** is singular, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “them”
4:5 wuw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄλλο 1 Jesus is using the adjective **other** as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seed that did not fall beside the road. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seed”
4:5 w3g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πετρῶδες, ὅπου οὐκ εἶχεν γῆν πολλήν 1 Here Jesus describes an area that has a thin layer of soil on top of a layer of rocks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes this kind of area. Alternate translation: “a thin layer of soil on top of rocks” or “a rocky area, where there was very little soil”
4:5 uhlr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἄλλο & οὐκ εἶχεν & ἐξανέτειλεν & τὸ μὴ ἔχειν 1 In this verse, the word **other** and the word **it** throughout the verse are singular in form, but they refer to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “others … they did not have … they sprang up … they did not have”
4:5 hyj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εὐθὺς ἐξανέτειλεν διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βάθος γῆς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because it did not have deep soil, immediately it sprang up”
4:5 u5rz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξανέτειλεν 1 Here, the phrase **sprang up** refers to how plants sprout or begin to grow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “it came up” or “it began to grow”
4:6 z2el rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέτειλεν ὁ ἥλιος 1 Here, the phrase **the sun rose** refers to the sun coming up over the horizon in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sun came up” or “the sun began to shine in the morning”
4:6 bm38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐκαυματίσθη & τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξηράνθη 1 Here, although the pronoun **it** is singular throughout the verse, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed in [4:5](../04/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “they were scorched … they had no root, they withered”
4:6 ee49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the sun. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched it”
4:6 yzk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ῥίζαν 1 Jesus says **no root** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it had almost no root” or “it had very small roots”
4:7 dfph rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἄλλο & αὐτό & οὐκ ἔδωκεν 1 In this verse, the word **other** and the word **it** throughout the verse are singular in form, but they refer to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “others … them … they did not produce”
4:7 bw62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄλλο 1 Jesus is using the adjective **other** as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seed that did not fall beside the road or on rocky soil. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated the word in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seed”
4:7 f0j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ συνέπνιξαν αὐτό 1 Here Jesus means that the **thorns** grew quickly and took all the nutrients, water, and sunlight, so the farmer’s plants could not grow well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew very large and crowded it out” or “the thorns grew faster and kept it from growing well”
4:7 fgz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καρπὸν οὐκ ἔδωκεν 1 Here the word **fruit** refers to the crop that the plants that grew from the seeds should have produced. Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would have been more wheat seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it did not produce more seeds” or “when it sprouted it did not produce a harvest”
4:7 pj8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns καρπὸν 1 Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”
4:8 oo4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄλλα 1 Jesus is using the adjective **others** as a noun to mean some of the rest of the seeds that did not fall beside the road, on rocky soil, or onto thorns. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “some of the rest of the seeds”
4:8 u327 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἐδίδου καρπὸν, ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξανόμενα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the phrases **growing up and being increased** describe something that happened before what the phrase **it was giving fruit** describes. Alternate translation: “growing up and being increased, it was giving fruit”
4:8 b0of rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐδίδου καρπὸν 1 Here the word **fruit** refers to the crop that the plants that grew from the seeds produced. Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would be more seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “it was producing more seeds” or “it sprouted and produced a harvest”
4:8 isto rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐδίδου 1 Here, although the pronoun **it** is singular, it refers to the seeds that the farmer sowed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the plural form here. Alternate translation: “they were giving”
4:8 yzp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns καρπὸν 1 Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fruits”
4:8 c0r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ αὐξανόμενα 1 The terms **growing up** and **being increased** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “growing very large” or “quickly increasing in size”
4:8 cukq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐξανόμενα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “increasing”
4:8 ym3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Here Jesus means that each of the plants produced either **30**, **60**, or **100** new seeds. Jesus does not mean that there were only three plants. Scholars estimate that these numbers of seeds are very good in Jesus’ time period, although not impossible or unheard of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “some plants were producing 30 seeds, and some plants were producing 60 seeds, and other plants were producing 100 seeds” or “they were bearing many times more than the farmer planted: one group of plants 30 times more, and one group of plants 60 times more, and one group of plants 100 times more”
4:8 d5q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἔφερεν εἰς τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Jesus is using the number **one** as a noun to mean one of the plants. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one plant was bearing 30, and one plant, 60, and one plant, 100”
4:8 v3sr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one was bearing 60, and one was bearing 100”
4:9 p2us rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Here, the phrase **ears to hear** represents the willingness to understand and obey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Whoever wishes to understand, let him understand and obey” or “Whoever can listen to me should pay attention”\n
4:9 qxy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὃς ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, not about other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person plural here. Alternate translation: “You who have ears to hear should hear” or “If you have ears to hear, then hear”\n
4:9 f0ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p ἀκουέτω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he should hear”
4:9 fr1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀκουέτω 1 Although the term **him** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “let that person hear”
4:10 u2nj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτε ἐγένετο κατὰ μόνας 1 The phrase **he was alone** does not mean that there was no one at all with Jesus. Rather, it means that the crowds were gone and Jesus was only with the 12 disciples and some of his other close followers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the crowds left” or “when the crowds were gone”
4:10 nlf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν 1 Here, the phrase **the ones around him** refers to disciples who were near Jesus at the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the disciples who were near him”
4:10 kqcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom Jesus had chosen to be apostles”
4:10 hvgd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἠρώτων αὐτὸν & τὰς παραβολάς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “were asking him, ‘Please tell us about the parables’”
4:11 t9ee rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δέδοται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has given”
4:11 rs81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ μυστήριον & τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **the mystery** that is about **the kingdom of God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the mystery concerning the kingdom of God”
4:11 q2az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκείνοις & τοῖς ἔξω 1 Here Jesus speaks of people who are not his disciples as if they were **outside**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to those, the ones who are not my disciples”
4:11 espn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται 1 Here Jesus implies that **everything** is what is he teaches, and he only teaches **in parables**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I teach is in parables” or “I use parables whenever I teach anything”
4:12 c18b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus uses parables when teaching people who are not his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “which is true in order that” or “and that is so that”
4:12 e33y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἵνα βλέποντες, βλέπωσι καὶ μὴ ἴδωσιν; καὶ ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι καὶ μὴ συνιῶσιν; μήποτε ἐπιστρέψωσιν καὶ ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “so that, as the Scriptures say, looking, they may look but may not see, and hearing, they may hear but may not understand, lest they might turn back, and it might be forgiven to them”
4:12 ydqt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ἵνα 1 Here Jesus quotes from the Old Testament scriptures, specifically from [Isaiah 6:9–10](../isa/06/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that, in the words of one of the prophets,” or “so that, as Isaiah the prophet wrote in the Scriptures,”
4:12 p4fv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέποντες, βλέπωσι & ἀκούοντες, ἀκούωσι 1 Here the author of the quotation repeats the words **look** and **hear** in order to emphasize that the people really do **look** and **hear**. If your language can repeat words for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “They will certainly look … they will certainly hear” or “They will indeed look … they will indeed hear”
4:12 p9yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 The author of the quotation is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. So, to **turn back** would be to start listening to and obeying God again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might start obeying God again”
4:12 g14p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφεθῇ αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “they might receive forgiveness” or “God might give them forgiveness”
4:13 qtuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
4:13 fs1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, καὶ πῶς πάσας τὰς παραβολὰς γνώσεσθε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke and teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not understand this parable. Because of that, you will not understand all the parables.” or “If you do not understand this parable, you cannot understand all the parables!”
4:14 m72p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ σπείρων τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 Here Jesus speaks about what **the word** as if it were what the **sower sows** in the parable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what the sower sows is like the word”
4:14 xdaj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν λόγον σπείρει 1 See how you translated “sow”in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “throws the word like seeds over the ground” or “scatters the word like seeds over the field”
4:14 rp6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:15 j8ir rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δέ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the next thing that Jesus wants to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next topic, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,”
4:15 p68u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗτοι & εἰσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν 1 Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown **beside the road**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happens to some people is like what happened to the seeds that were sown beside the road”
4:15 jzok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπείρεται ὁ λόγος & τὸν ἐσπαρμένον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the actions, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone is sowing the word … that someone sowed”
4:15 xea4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος & τὸν λόγον 1 Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel … the gospel”
4:15 gcuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὐθὺς ἔρχεται ὁ Σατανᾶς, καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐσπαρμένον εἰς αὐτούς 1 Here Jesus speaks about the gospel as if it were seeds that had been **sown in** people. He speaks of **Satan** as if he were a bird that swoops down and **takes away** the seeds. Since these figures of speech connect to the parable that Jesus told, if possible you should preserve them or express the ideas in simile form. Alternate translation: “Satan immediately comes like a bird and takes away the word, which had been sown like seeds in them”
4:16 jm75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ & ὁμοίως 1 Here, the phrase **And similarly** indicates that Jesus is about to describe what happens to other people and that what happens is similar to what happened to the people he described in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a similar event or experience. Alternate translation: “Likewise” or “In a similar way”
4:16 ty3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile οὗτοί εἰσιν & οἱ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι; οἳ 1 Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were **sown on the rocky ground**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “what happened to the seeds having been sown on the rocky ground is like what happens to those who”
4:16 d7ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπειρόμενοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”
4:16 l3oe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ πετρώδη 1 Here, just as in [4:5](../04/05.md), Jesus refers to an area that has a thin layer of soil on top of a layer of rocks. Express the idea as you did in that verse. Alternate translation: “a thin layer of soil on top of rocks” or “a rocky area”
4:16 gdq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:16 fcfj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ χαρᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “joyfully”
4:17 s057 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** introduces what happens to these people in contrast with how they at first received the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
4:17 p5fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔχουσιν ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιροί εἰσιν 1 Here Jesus speaks about these people as if they were the plants in the parable that had **no root** and were only **temporary** since they withered when the sun rose. Since this figure of speech connects to the parable that Jesus told, if possible you should preserve it or express the ideas in simile form. Alternate translation: “they are like plants with no roots that do not live for long”\n
4:17 s5mh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole οὐκ & ῥίζαν 1 Here, just as in [4:6](../04/06.md), Jesus says **no root** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “almost no root” or “very small roots”
4:17 mwg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενομένης θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract nouns for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when they are afflicted or persecuted”
4:17 hqvw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:17 cazb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σκανδαλίζονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they stumble”\n
4:17 t21w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίζονται 1 Here, Jesus speaks of ceasing to believe the gospel as if it were stumbling. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the stop believing” or “they cease to trust the good news”\n
4:18 uu9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄλλοι εἰσὶν οἱ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπειρόμενοι 1 Here Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown **into the thorns**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happened to the seeds having been sown into the thorns is like what happens to others”
4:18 wlab rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπειρόμενοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”
4:18 o3pb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:19 glok rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** introduces what happens to these people in contrast with how they received the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
4:19 wa3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου, καὶ αἱ περὶ τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **worries**, **deceitfulness**, and **desires**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they worry about this age and are deceived by riches and desire other things. These things”
4:19 r7ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession αἱ μέριμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **worries** that are related to **this age**. In other words, the **worries** are about things and problems that exist in **this age** or world. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the worries about things in this age” or “the worries about what happens in this age”
4:19 k04f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **riches** that are characterized by **deceitfulness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “deceitful riches” or “riches that deceive”
4:19 g1v0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification εἰσπορευόμεναι 1 Here Jesus speaks as if **the worries of the age and the deceitfulness of riches and the desires concerning other things** were people who could be **entering in** a place. He means that these things begin to be part of these people’s lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which these people start to experience” or “which characterize these people’s lives”
4:19 s7s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνπνίγουσιν τὸν λόγον καὶ ἄκαρπος γίνεται 1 Here Jesus continues to speak about what happens to these people as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown into the thorns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternate translation: “prevent the word from being effective, just as the thorns choked the seeds and made them unfruitful”
4:19 zg3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:20 axh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκεῖνοί εἰσιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν καλὴν σπαρέντες; οἵτινες ἀκούουσιν τὸν λόγον καὶ παραδέχονται καὶ καρποφοροῦσιν, ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Here Jesus speaks about what happens to this person as if it were what happened in the parable when the seeds were sown **on the good soil** and produced crops of various sizes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in simile form. Alternative translation: “what happened to the seeds sown on the good soil is like what happens to the one hearing the word and receiving it. That person will be like a seed that bears fruit—one, 30, and one, 60, and one, 100”\n
4:20 tdwj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπαρέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the farmer who was sowing seed. Alternate translation: “whom the farmer sowed”
4:20 cxfw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Just as in [4:14](../04/14.md), Jesus is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which people preach using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:20 xbq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns καρποφοροῦσιν 1 Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “bear fruits”
4:20 pwiw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Here Jesus means that each of the plants produced either 30, 60, or 100 new seeds. Jesus does not mean that there were only three plants. Scholars estimate that these numbers of seeds are very good in Jesus’ time period, although not impossible or unheard of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make those ideas more explicit. See how you expressed the idea in [4:8](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “some producing 30 seeds, and some producing 60 seeds, and some producing 100 seeds”
4:20 d3r7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one was bearing 30, and one was bearing 60, and one was bearing 100”
4:20 a9yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἓν τριάκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ἓν ἑκατόν 1 Jesus is using the number **one** as a noun to mean one of the plants. Your language may use numbers in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “one plant, 30, and one plant, 60, and one plant, 100”
4:21 enzz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) all the people who were nearby, including both the disciples and the crowds. Alternate translation: “to the disciples and the crowds” or “everyone who was with him” (2) just the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”
4:21 nn7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν τεθῇ? 1 Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “The lamp does not come so that it might be put under a basket or under the bed but so that it might be put on the lampstand.” or “The lamp certainly does not come so that it might be put under a basket or under the bed! No, it comes so that it might be put on the lampstand!”
4:21 l79p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν τεθῇ 1 The words **The lamp**, **the basket**, **the bed**, and **the lampstand** represent lamps, baskets, beds, and lampstands in general, not one particular lamp, basket, bed, or lampstand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Lamps do not come so that they might be put under baskets or under beds, do they? Is it not so that they might be put on lampstands”
4:21 zzw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος 1 Here Jesus speaks as if the **lamp** were a person who could **come**. He means that someone lights the lamp and brings it into a house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The lamp is not lit … is it” or “The lamp is not brought into a house … is it”
4:21 dkq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τεθῇ & οὐχ ἵνα & τεθῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone might put it … Is it not so that someone might put it”
4:21 u7lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον 1 A **basket** is a large circular container that stores food or other items. If someone put a lamp under this kind of container, it would completely hide the light from the lamp. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in a box” or “under a container that hides its light”
4:21 y7f9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην 1 A **bed** is a piece of furniture that people would lie on when they were eating or sleeping. Most likely, this kind of **bed** had short legs that raised it off the floor. If someone put a lamp under this kind of furniture, it would hide the light from the lamp. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “under a couch” or “under furniture”
4:21 gc4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν 1 Here Jesus implies that the lamp can illuminate a large area when it is on a **lampstand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the lampstand to that it illuminates the whole room” or “on the lampstand where it lights up the area”
4:22 pjxi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of the illustration that Jesus gave in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “And so,”
4:22 ov23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that things that are **hidden** or **secret** only in order that they might **be revealed** or **come into visibility**. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “things are not hidden except so that they might be revealed. Things have not become secret except so that they might come into visibility”\n
4:22 kc6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 These these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the clauses with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two clauses into one. Alternate translation: “it is not hidden except so that it might be revealed; yes, it has not become secret except so that it might come into visibility” or “it is not hidden except so that it will come into visibility”
4:22 y5kn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making statements here and then contradicting them, you could reword this sentence to avoid using exception clauses. Alternate translation: “it is only hidden so that it might be revealed, and it has only become secret so that it might come into visibility”
4:22 hou4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the actions, you could: (1) use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “they do not hide it except so that they might reveal it, nor do they make it secret except so that they might bring it into visibility” (2) indicate that God did them. Alternate translation: “God has not hidden it except so that he might reveal it, nor has he made it secret except so that he might bring it into visibility”
4:22 x0dp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐ & ἐστιν & οὐδὲ ἐγένετο 1 The pronoun **it** in both places refers generally to any thing. Jesus may more specifically have in mind the meaning of his preaching or the kingdom of God. However, since Jesus uses a general proverb form, if possible you also should use a general form that could refer to many things. Alternate translation: “nothing is …nothing has become” or “something is not … nor has something become”
4:22 h8pk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **visibility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “it might become visible”
4:22 qzfx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 Here, the phrase **it will come into visibility** means that something will be revealed or become known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it will be known”
4:23 k1a8 εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 See how you translated the similar sentence in [4:9](../04/09.md).
4:24 r2r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, just as in [4:21](../04/21.md), the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) all the people who were nearby, including both the disciples and the crowds. Alternate translation: “to the disciples and the crowds” or “everyone who was with him” (2) just the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”
4:24 d1bs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέπετε 1 Here Jesus speaks as if people who **Watch** things that they **hear**. He means that they need to pay attention to what they **hear**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to”
4:24 en93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb. He could be using it to teach: (1) that people learn and understand only whatever they chose to listen carefully to. Alternate translation: “Whatever you pay attention to is what you will learn and know” or “How you listen shows what you will know and understand” (2) that people eventually experience for themselves how they have treated other people. Alternate translation: “what you give to others is what you will get and acquire in return” or “what you do to others will be done to you”
4:24 zis1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **measure**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you measure”
4:24 c4xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will measure it to you, and he will add it to you”
4:24 lqor rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 In both places, the word **it** refers to what **you measure**. Jesus is speaking in general about anything that people **measure**, so you should avoid making the phrase specific. Alternate translation: “the same thing will be measured to you, and it will be added to you” or “that very thing will be measured to you, and it will be added to you”
4:24 sbmk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 Here Jesus uses the phrase **will be added to you** to indicate that God will give all what is **measured**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it will be given to you”
4:25 xmeh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Jesus said in the previous verse about paying careful attention to what one hears. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is what I mean:” or “To put it another way,”
4:25 nkth rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs ὃς & ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ; καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, Jesus uses or invents a proverb in order to teach that people who have something usually gain more of it, while people who have very little usually lose everything. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “people who have things receive more, and people who do not have things lose what they used to have”
4:25 arv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς & ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ; καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus implies that what the person has or does not have is knowledge or understanding about the good news that Jesus proclaims. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he who has understanding, it will be given to him, and he who does not have understanding, even what he has will be taken away from him” or “he who has knowledge about the gospel, more will be given to him, and he who does not have knowledge about the gospel, even what knowledge he has will be taken away from him”
4:25 i24l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθήσεται & ἀρθήσεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take away”
4:25 jfog rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ὃς & αὐτῷ & ὃς οὐκ ἔχει & ἔχει & αὐτοῦ 1 Although the terms **he** and **him** are masculine in this verse, Jesus is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use phrases that make this clear. Alternate translation: “the person who … to that person … the person who does not have … that person … him or her”
4:25 oceg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** introduces a person **who does not have** in contrast to the person **who has**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
4:25 emrz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὃς οὐκ ἔχει 1 Jesus says **he who does not have** here as a generalization for emphasis. It is clear in the second half of the sentence that the person did have something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “he who has almost nothing” or “he who does not have much”
4:26 n1mq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 To teach his audience, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story. Thus is the kingdom of God: As a man throws seed on the ground”
4:26 r5n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ: ὡς ἄνθρωπος 1 Jesus is saying that the **kingdom of God** is like **a man** who throws seed on the ground. The following verses will give further information about this comparison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces this kind of comparison. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is like a man who”
4:26 htar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Here and in the following verses, Jesus tells a story about a specific **man**. It is not important for the story whether the person is a man or a woman. If you have a form that refers to any person without identifying a gender, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could identify the person as a man, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “a person”
4:26 in2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βάλῃ τὸν σπόρον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 While there are many ways to sow or plant seeds, here Jesus is describing a practice in which a farmer pick sup handfuls of **seed** and **throws** them so that they are scattered all over the top of the soil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what the **man** is doing. Alternate translation: “sows the seed on the earth” or “scatters the seeds over the field”
4:26 gd9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τὸν σπόρον 1 Here, the word **seed** is singular in form, but it refers to many seeds as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “the seeds”
4:27 b0us rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καθεύδῃ καὶ ἐγείρηται, νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Here Jesus means that the farmer **sleeps** at **night** and **gets up** when it is **day**. This indicates that the farmer lives a normal life and does what he normally does over a period of many days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he sleeps at night and gets up in the morning each day” or “he lives a normal life over the next days”
4:27 dgym rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὁ σπόρος 1 See how you translated **the seed** in [4:26](../04/26.md). Alternate translation: “the seeds”
4:27 pul0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς 1 Here Jesus implies that the farmer does not understand the process by which **the seed sprouts and grows**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “how the seed does that” or “the way in which that happens”
4:27 yqr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτός 1 Jesus uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that the farmer **does not know**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “he indeed”
4:28 b4xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ γῆ καρποφορεῖ 1 Here, Jesus speaks of **The soil** as if it were a person who could produce **a crop**. He means that the plants grow out of the **soil** and produce **a crop**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The crop grows from the soil” or “Each plant sprouts out of the soil to produce a crop”
4:28 dcwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτομάτη 1 Here, the phrase **of its own accord** indicates that the **soil** produced the crop without help or assistance from anyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by itself” or “without any help”
4:28 cew8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown χόρτον 1 Here, the word **blade** refers to a leaf of the grain plant. This is the first part of the plant that comes up through the soil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a leaf” or “a sprout”
4:28 i7lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown στάχυν & τῷ στάχυϊ 1 The **head** is the topmost part of the grain plant. The **head** holds the **mature grain** or seeds of the plant, which are the parts that people eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the top of the grain plant … the top of the grain plant” or “the edible part of the grain plant … the edible part of the grain plant”
4:28 gesi πλήρης σῖτον 1 Alternate translation: “full-grown grain” or “grain that is ready to eat”
4:29 s2cf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός 1 Here, the word **fruit** is singular in form, but it refers to many fruits, or seeds of grain, as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “grain seeds hand over”
4:29 hepg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παραδοῖ ὁ καρπός 1 Here, the clause **the fruit hands over** means that the crop of grain is ripe and ready to be used for food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the fruit is ripe” or “the fruit is ready”
4:29 hdp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εὐθὺς ἀποστέλλει τὸ δρέπανον, ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because the harvest has come, he immediately sends the sickle”
4:29 ah9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ δρέπανον 1 Here, **the sickle** represents workers who use sickles to harvest the grain. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people with sickles” or “workers who use sickles to harvest the crop”
4:29 yd1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown δρέπανον 1 A **sickle** is a tool with a curved blade that agricultural workers use to cut down standing crops in order to harvest them. If your readers would not be familiar with what a sickle is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “sharp harvesting tool”
4:29 hx6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παρέστηκεν ὁ θερισμός 1 Here, the clause **the harvest has come** means that it is the right time for **the harvest** to begin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is harvest time” or “it is the right time for the harvest”
4:30 ivk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to introduce what he is about to teach. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We will now compare the kingdom of God to something. We will put it in a parable.”
4:30 v30a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πῶς ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν 1 By **we**, Jesus means himself and his audience, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Jesus uses this form because he wants his audience to be involved in thinking about how parables can help explain the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “What would be a good comparison for us to use for the kingdom of God, or what parable could we use for it”
4:30 lj2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 Here, the word **or** introduces another similar question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a related question, or you could leave **or** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and” or “or again,”
4:30 jduf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τίνι αὐτὴν παραβολῇ θῶμεν 1 Here Jesus speaks as if **the kingdom of God** were an object that he could **put** in a **parable**, which he speaks about as if it were a container. He means that he can explain **the kingdom of God** by using a **parable**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with what parable will we describe it” or “what parable can we use to explain it”
4:31 qvr0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ὡς κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 To teach his audience, Jesus offers a story or illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story: It is like a mustard seed”
4:31 l8gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 A **mustard seed** is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of seed, in your translation you could use the name of another seed like it, or you could use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “a very small seed”
4:31-32 dfkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ὃς ὅταν σπαρῇ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, μικρότερον ὂν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς & καὶ ὅταν σπαρῇ, ἀναβαίνει 1 Here Jesus repeats the clause **when it has been sown**. This was a natural way in his language to describe the seed and the action. If repeating this clause would be redundant in your language, you could rearrange the clauses and only include the repeated clause once. Alternate translation: “which, being the smallest of all the seeds on the earth, when it has been sown, grows”
4:31 w4l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπαρῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “a person has sown it” or “they have sown it”
4:31 jf5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μικρότερον & πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων 1 Jesus says **smallest of all the seeds** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “one of the smallest seeds” or “smaller than most seeds”
4:32 osdk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπαρῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. See how you expressed the idea in [4:31](../04/31.md). Alternate translation: “a person has sown it” or “they have sown it”
4:32 p9nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πάντων τῶν λαχάνων 1 The phrase **vegetable plants** refers to plants that people grow so that they can eat them or parts of them. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “all the other plants that people grow to eat” or “all the plants that people have in their gardens”
4:32 tyok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 In your language, it might seem that this phrase expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the birds”
4:32 lu6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατασκηνοῦν 1 Here, the word **nest** could indicate that: (1) the birds are building nests in the **shadow** of the mustard plant. Alternate translation: “build nests” (2) the birds are perching or resting in the **shadow** of the mustard plant. Alternate translation: “perch” or “roost”
4:32 dywv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in its shadow** could imply that the birds are nesting: (1) in the lower branches of the plant, which are in the **shadow** of the higher branches. Alternate translation: “in its shadow in the lower branches” (2) on the ground that is in the **shadow** of the plant. Alternate translation: “in its shadow on the ground”
4:33-34 y7i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς, ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν & χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς, κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς ἰδίοις μαθηταῖς, ἐπέλυεν πάντα 1 This sentence marks the end of Jesus’ teaching by summarizing how Jesus taught the crowds. Use a natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a speech. Alternate translation: “Before he stopped teaching them, he used many such parables to speak the word to them, just as they were able to hear; but he did not speak to them without a parable, but by himself he explained everything to his own disciples”
4:33 nfck rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Mark is using the term **word** to mean the gospel, which Jesus preached using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gospel”
4:33 u82i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀκούειν 1 Here Mark could mean that: (1) Jesus told his audience as much as he knew that they could **hear**. Alternate translation: “teaching them all the things that they were able to hear” (2) Jesus spoke to his audience in a way that he knew they could **hear**. Alternate translation: “teaching them in a way that they could hear”
4:33 kol8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκούειν 1 Here Mark uses the word **hear** to refer to both hearing and understanding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to realize what he meant”
4:34 oo4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς & παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he was only speaking to them with a parable”\n
4:34 gp99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here, the word **everything** refers to every parable that Jesus spoke to the people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every parable”
4:35 fzew rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
4:35 jz5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 Here Jesus implies that he wants to go with the disciples **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”
4:36 y2y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παραλαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν 1 Here Mark implies that they took Jesus across the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they take him across the lake with them”
4:36 lezj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παραλαμβάνουσιν αὐτὸν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they took him with them”
4:36 iybd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἦν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ 1 Here Mark means that Jesus was already in the boat, so they could leave right away (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as he was already in the boat” or “using the boat he was sitting in”
4:36 z8gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that other people got into **boats** and sailed with Jesus and his disciples across the lake. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “many people got into other boats to sail with him”
4:37 nddy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense γίνεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “happened”
4:37 fmgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς 1 When waves are **breaking into** a boat, they are high enough that they come over the side of the boat and splash water into it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were coming over the sides into”
4:37 oad8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἤδη γεμίζεσθαι τὸ πλοῖον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the waves. Alternate translation: “the waves were already filling the boat”
4:38 cets rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἦν 1 Mark uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Jesus was **in the stern, sleeping**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “as for Jesus, he was”
4:38 uauq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῇ πρύμνῃ 1 The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back end of the boat”
4:38 lwed rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ προσκεφάλαιον 1 A **cushion** is a soft object that person would lie or rest on. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of object, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the sleeping pad” or “a soft surface”
4:38 hw93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἐγείρουσιν αὐτὸν καὶ λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they woke him up and said”
4:38 b4xb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα? 1 The disciples are using the question form to show Jesus that they are afraid and to convince him to do something to help them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “it should be a concern to you that we are perishing.” or “it is clearly not a concern to you that we are perishing!”
4:38 viz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ μέλει σοι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **concern**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “does it not concern you”
4:38 fu0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σοι 1 Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the word **you** here is singular.
4:38 qtb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀπολλύμεθα 1 Here, the word **we** includes both Jesus and the disciples. Your language may require you to mark this form.
4:39 yym6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σιώπα, πεφίμωσο 1 The terms **Be silent** and **Be still** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Be very calm!” or “Be completely still!”
4:39 mnsa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σιώπα, πεφίμωσο 1 Because Jesus is speaking to the sea, the commands **Be silent** and **Be still** are singular.
4:39 ydoa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο γαλήνη μεγάλη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **calm**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sea became very calm”
4:40 w5n4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the disciples for being **cowardly** and for **not yet** having **faith**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “You should not be cowardly. I am disappointed that you do not have more faith.” or “Do not be cowardly! You should have already have faith!”
4:40 t6qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Jesus could be implying that this **faith** is in: (1) God. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet believe God” (2) himself. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet trust me”
4:41 txh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐφοβήθησαν φόβον μέγαν 1 Here, the phrase **feared a great fear** means that they were extremely afraid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were extremely afraid” or “they were terrified”
4:41 u8e1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ? 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this into two sentences, one asking the question, and the other giving the reason for the question. Alternate translation: “Who then is this? Even the wind and the sea obey him!”
4:41 biog τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ 1 This is a genuine question, not a statement in question form. The disciples are looking for information about what kind of person Jesus could be if he can do these things. Alternate translation: “Who then is this person, for even the wind and the sea obey him”
4:41 hc6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τίς ἄρα 1 Here, the word **then** indicates that the disciples ask this question in response to what Jesus has done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “So then, who” or “Given what he just did, who”
5:intro lh25 0 # Mark 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Becoming more popular among the people (3:7–5:43)\n * Casting demons out of a man (5:1–20)\n * Healing a woman and resurrecting a girl (5:21–43)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrecting the dead\n\nIn [5:21–24](../05/21.md) and [5:35–43](../05/35.md), Mark narrates how Jesus raised a girl from the dead. While Jesus describes her as only “sleeping,” he uses this word to indicate that the girl will “wake up” from being dead. The story clearly indicates that the girl had died and that Jesus raises her from the dead by touching her.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### How to refer to the demons and the demon-possessed man\n\nIn [5:1–20](../05/01.md), Jesus encounters a man whom demons had possessed. As Jesus interacts with this man, it becomes clear that there are three different entities who are involved. First, there is the man himself, but what he says and does is only what the demons want him to do. Second, there is a specific demon who seems to act as the spokesperson or leader for multiple demons. Third, there are the other demons, of whom there are so many that the man is called “Legion.” As Mark narrates the story, he sometimes refers to the man, sometimes to the individual demon, and sometimes to all the demons. Further, it is not always clear which of these three entities speaks and is spoken to by Jesus. Consider how you might refer to a demon-possessed person in this situation. If possible, preserve Mark’s switches between singular and plural, since learning that there are many demons is an important part of the story. Further, Mark implies that the man and the demons are so closely connected that referring to what the man did is the same as referring to what the demons did, and vice versa.\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chapter appear in dialogues between Jesus and other individuals. Because of this, most forms of “you” in this chapter are singular. You should assume forms of “you” are singular unless a note specifies that the form is plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 7, 9, 15, 19, 22, 23, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40 and 41. If it would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense]])
5:1 fix1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
5:1 gt8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they came”
5:1 vsc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 The name **Gerasenes** refers to the people who lived in and near the town of Gerasa.
5:1 dzc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **Gerasenes**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “Gadarenes,” and other ancient manuscripts read “Gergesenes.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
5:2 pf16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντος 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
5:2 zwtq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν μνημείων ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 Here Mark introduces **a man with an unclean spirit** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a certain man came from the tombs to meet him. This man had an unclean spirit”
5:3 pinm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ὃς τὴν κατοίκησιν εἶχεν ἐν τοῖς μνήμασιν 1 Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. This background information continues in [5:4](../05/04.md) and [5:5](../05/05.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and here is what that man was like. He had his dwelling in the tombs”
5:3-4 nll4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge καὶ οὐδὲ ἁλύσει οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι & διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν πολλάκις πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι δεδέσθαι, καὶ διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἴσχυεν αὐτὸν δαμάσαι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md) into a verse bridge in order to include the basis for the claim that **no one was able to bind him anymore** before the claim. Alternate translation: “and he had often been bound with shackles and chains, and the chains had been torn apart by him and the shackles had been shattered. So, no one was strong enough to subdue him or to bind him anymore, not even with a chain”
5:3 pjsx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτὸν δῆσαι 1 Here Mark implies that people tried to **bind** this man to keep him from hurting people and breaking things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “no one was able to bind him anymore to keep him from hurting others” or “no one was able to use bonds to restrain him anymore”
5:3 dryi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκέτι οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο 1 The words translated **no one** and **anymore** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “people were able … no longer”\n
5:3 nsol rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἁλύσει 1 A **chain** is a long, flexible fastener that is made out of multiple rings of metal connected together. Chains are usually used to secure objects or bind things together. If your readers would not be familiar with chains, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with metal links connected together”
5:4 da4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτὸν πολλάκις & δεδέσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who lived nearby. Alternate translation: “the people who lived there had often bound him”
5:4 fk7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πέδαις & τὰς πέδας 1 The word **shackles** refers to pieces of metal that are fastened around the ankles of prisoners. These pieces of metal are connected together by ropes or chains, which prevent the prisoners from moving quickly or far. If your readers would not be familiar with shackles, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “with leg irons … the leg irons” or “with strong restraints … the restraints”
5:4 dk1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἁλύσεσι & τὰς ἁλύσεις 1 See how you translated the word **chains** in [5:3](../05/03.md). Alternate translation: “metal links connected together … the metal links”
5:4 rjo3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces what the demon-possessed man did in contrast to what the people who tied him up wanted him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
5:4 nep6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διεσπάσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις καὶ τὰς πέδας συντετρῖφθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had torn apart the chains and had shattered the shackles”
5:5 ohvk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διὰ παντὸς νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **throughout every night and day** indicates that this man was **crying out and cutting himself with stones** during both the day and the night. This means that he was doing those things very often every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “during every day and every night”
5:6 y6c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἰδὼν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἀπὸ μακρόθεν 1 Here Mark stops giving background information and returns to the events in the story that he is telling. He implies that the man saw Jesus when he arrived in the boat from the other side of the Sea of Galilee (see [5:1–2](../05/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Now, having seen Jesus from a distance when he got out of the boat”
5:6 w9zd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσεκύνησεν αὐτῷ 1 In the Jesus’ culture, bowing down to a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what bowing down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated himself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”
5:7-8 ux6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge καὶ κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ λέγει, τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν, μή με βασανίσῃς & ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ, ἔξελθε, τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἀκάθαρτον ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:7](../05/07.md) and [5:8](../05/08.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reason why the man cried out as he did before stating that the man cried out. Alternate translation: “And Jesus was saying to him, ‘Come out from the man, unclean spirit.’ So, crying out with a loud voice, he says, ‘What to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God? I make you swear by God, do not torment me.’”
5:7 x6qj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κράξας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 Here, the phrase **crying out with a loud voice** means that the demon raised the volume of its voice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having yelled loudly”
5:7 zfo5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
5:7 ppu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί Ἰησοῦ, Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου? 1 The man, controlled by the demon, is using the question form to insist on something urgently. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is nothing to me and to you, Jesus, Son of the Most High God!”
5:7 fatr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί 1 Here, the question **What to me and to you** asks whether **you** and **me** have anything in common or have any reason to be together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What do you and I have in common” or “What reason do you have to get involved with me”
5:7 kd19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὲ τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 **Son of the Most High God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship with God the Father.
5:7 urq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ὁρκίζω σε τὸν Θεόν 1 Here the man, controlled by the demon, puts Jesus under oath, or makes him **swear by God** that he will not **torment** him. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I make you swear before God” or “I require that you solemnly promise God”
5:8 ahtn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the man, controlled by the demon, acted as he did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “He said that because” or “That was because”
5:9 j3h0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
5:9 h6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result Λεγιὼν ὄνομά μοι, ὅτι πολλοί ἐσμεν. 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “We are many, so my name is Legion”
5:9 oa64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λεγιὼν 1 A **Legion** is the name of a group of about 6,000 soldiers. So, translate the word **Legion** with a word in your language that refers to a large number of soldiers. You could show that this was the name of the man by using the convention in your language for proper names. Alternate translation: “is Army” or “is Battalion” or “is Brigade”
5:9 pdyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοί ἐσμεν 1 Here the demon indicates that he is speaking for many demons who are together controlling the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I and the other demons with me are many”
5:10 gtq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations πολλὰ, ἵνα μὴ αὐτὰ ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “often, ‘Do not send us demons out of this region’” or “often, ‘Do not send the legion of demons out of this region’”
5:11 jvrk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 Mark uses the word **But** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. It does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” or “At the same time,”
5:12 ttpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
5:12 kkf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πέμψον ἡμᾶς εἰς τοὺς χοίρους 1 Here the demons imply that they want Jesus to **Send** them **into the pigs** when Jesus casts them out of the man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Whenever you cast us out of this man, send us into the pigs”
5:12 trn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative πέμψον 1 This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send”
5:12 zmsp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & εἰσέλθωμεν 1 Here, the words **us** and **we** refer only to the demons, not to Jesus or any of his disciples. Your language may require you to mark this form.
5:12 z2j0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς αὐτοὺς εἰσέλθωμεν 1 Here the demons speak of wanting to **enter into** the herd of pigs. They mean that they want to enter and control the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we might enter into them and possess them”
5:13 iff6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **permitted** the demons to enter into the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he permitted them to enter into the pigs”
5:13 lfgr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he told them, ‘You may do so’”
5:13 lv3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξελθόντα 1 Here Mark implies that the demons came out of the man whom they had been controlling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come out of the man whom they had been possessing”
5:13 ntl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντα 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
5:13 zsd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [5:12](../05/12.md). Alternate translation: “entered into the pigs and possessed them”
5:13 a28z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς δισχίλιοι 1 Here Mark indicates that the herd was made up of **about 2,000** pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which was made up of about 2,000 pigs” or “about 2,000 pigs in all”
5:13 tdfk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπνίγοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “died by drowning”
5:14 cw1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants καὶ οἱ βόσκοντες αὐτοὺς ἔφυγον 1 Here Mark introduces **the ones feeding them** as new characters in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing new characters. Alternate translation: “And the ones feeding them were there. They ran away”
5:14 e32p οἱ βόσκοντες αὐτοὺς 1 Alternate translation: “the ones who were herding the pigs”
5:14 m4r2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς 1 Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole area”
5:14 zser rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς 1 Here, the **city** is most likely Gerasa, since Jesus got out of the boat near this town (see [5:1](../05/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the town of Gerasa and in the countryside around it”
5:14 hlen rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were living **in the city and in the countryside**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in those places went out”
5:14 y60p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “they came out”
5:15 g25a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται & θεωροῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came … saw”
5:15 yghh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
5:15 g5j1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον 1 Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed”
5:15 jkqa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν δαιμονιζόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons possessed”
5:15 vvsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἱματισμένον καὶ σωφρονοῦντα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “wearing clothes and having a sound mind”
5:15 fb4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σωφρονοῦντα 1 Here, the phrase **being sound-minded** means that the man was acting rationally and thinking like a normal person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “thinking sanely” or “acting rationally”
5:15 dg5o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸν ἐσχηκότα τὸν λεγεῶνα 1 Here Mark means that the man had been possessed or controlled by **the legion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one that had been possessed by the legion” or “the one whom the legion had possessed”
5:15 qih4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν λεγεῶνα 1 See how you translated the word **legion** in [Mark 5:9](../05/09.md). Here, however, the word is a not a name, so use the appropriate form to refer to a large number of demons. Alternate translation: “the army” or “the battalion” or “the brigade”
5:15 ntu4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν 1 The implication is that **they were afraid** of what else such a powerful person as Jesus might do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of what else Jesus might do, since they recognized what great power he had”
5:16 yy4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἰδόντες 1 Here Mark implies that these people saw what happened to the man and the pigs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “those who had seen what had happened”
5:16 is0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ 1 Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the one who used to be demon-possessed”
5:16 nivb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the one whom the demons possessed”
5:17 hhqm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτὸν ἀπελθεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please depart from our region’”
5:18 z69m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς 1 Here Mark is referring to the man who had been **demon-possessed** until Jesus forced the demons out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. See how you expressed the similar phrase in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “the one who used to be demon-possessed”
5:18 ayyh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ δαιμονισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the demons had possessed”
5:18 pup5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτὸν & ἵνα μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let me me be with you!’”
5:18 gbni rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετ’ αὐτοῦ ᾖ 1 Here Mark means that the man wanted to go wherever Jesus went, listen to what he said, and spend much time with him as a disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he might go with him” or “he might follow him”
5:19 m8oq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces what Jesus said in contrast to what the man wanted him to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But”
5:19 wssd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
5:19 p7iq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς σούς 1 Here, the phrase translated **your {people}** could refer to: (1) the man’s family, relatives, and friends. Alternate translation: “the people you know” (2) just the man’s family. Alternate translation: “your family”
5:19 dxnp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὅσα ὁ Κύριός σοι πεποίηκεν, καὶ ἠλέησέν σε 1 The phrases **has done for you** and **had mercy on you** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two phrases together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternatively, you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “as much as the Lord has done for you; yes, as much as he has had mercy on you” or “as much as the Lord has mercifully done for you”
5:19 h82t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Κύριός & πεποίηκεν 1 Here, the phrase **the Lord** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord, has done” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “I, the Lord, have done”
5:19 e4y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἠλέησέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “been merciful to you”
5:20 g8ed rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῇ Δεκαπόλει 1 The word **Decapolis** is a name for a region to the southeast of Galilee. The name means “the Ten Towns.”
5:20 y8vn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντες 1 Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who heard what the man proclaimed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all the people who listened to him”
5:21 lbcd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ διαπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ πάλιν εἰς τὸ πέραν, συνήχθη ὄχλος πολὺς ἐπ’ αὐτόν, καὶ ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 This verse introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “At that time, Jesus crossed over again to the other side in the boat. When he arrived, a great crowd was gathered around him, and he was beside the sea.”
5:21 pf3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διαπεράσαντος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Mark is referring to **Jesus** to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, along with his disciples, having crossed over”
5:21 wzus rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus crossed over **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “to the opposite side of the Sea of Galilee”
5:21 mtol rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνήχθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered” or “came together”
5:22 ilnk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could draw the audience’s attention in another way. Alternate translation: “picture this” or “suddenly”
5:22 s3xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἔρχεται εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων ὀνόματι Ἰάειρος 1 Here Mark introduces the synagogue ruler as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a man comes. He was one of the synagogue rulers, Jairus by name”
5:22 ser7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται & πίπτει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came … he fell”
5:22 u1rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “goes”
5:22 ueds rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction πίπτει πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 In Jesus’ culture, falling at someone’s feet was a position used to show respect and reverence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression for a physical position used to show respect or worship, or you could explain what this action means. Alternate translation: “he throws himself on the ground” or “he falls at his feet to show respect”
5:23 xeuz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παρακαλεῖ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he begged”
5:23 oku2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said”
5:23 x9qg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἐσχάτως ἔχει 1 Jairus is uses the phrase **has {her} last** to indicate that his daughter is about to die. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is on her deathbed” or “will soon breath her last” or “will die soon”
5:23 jd27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα ἐλθὼν, ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces what Jairus wants Jesus to do in response to what Jairus has told him about his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduce a desired response to a situation. Alternate translation: “so I ask that you, coming, lay your hands on her” or “and so, coming, I wish that you will lay your hands on her”
5:23 budr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθὼν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “going” instead of **coming**. Alternate translation: “going”
5:23 kzz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. Alternate translation: “you might heal her”
5:24 ptj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀπῆλθεν 1 Mark is referring to Jesus to represent both Jesus and his disciples, who traveled with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he, along with his disciples, went away”
5:25 e2cz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants γυνὴ οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος δώδεκα ἔτη 1 Here Mark introduces this **woman** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a woman there. She had been with a flow of blood for 12 years”
5:25 h58w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος 1 Mark uses the phrase **a flow of blood** to refer discreetly to her condition or illness. She was probably experiencing menstrual bleeding at many times, even when it was not the normal time for that. If your language has a polite way of referring to this condition, you could use that expression here, or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffering from abnormal menstruation” or “suffering from frequent menstrual bleeding”
5:26 mn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ πολλὰ παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν 1 Here Mark provides background information that will help readers understand what happens next. This background information continues in the first part of [5:27](../05/27.md). Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and in the past having suffered much from many physicians”
5:26 dus5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλὰ παθοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν 1 Here Mark could mean that the woman: (1) **suffered** from the treatments that the **physicians** used. Alternate translation: “having suffered much from the physicians’ treatments” or “being made to suffer by many physicians” (2) suffering while being treated by the **physicians**. Alternate translation: “having suffered much as physicians tried to treat her”
5:26 ogxd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δαπανήσασα τὰ παρ’ ἑαυτῆς πάντα 1 Here Mark implies that she **spent everything {that was} from herself** to pay the **physicians** to treat her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having spent everything that was from herself to pay for her treatments”
5:26 k9yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰ παρ’ ἑαυτῆς πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **everything {that was} from herself** refers to all the money and belongings that the woman had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that she had” or “all her money and possessions”
5:26 ewnx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὸ χεῖρον ἐλθοῦσα 1 Here, the phrase **having come to the worse** means that the woman’s situation was getting **worse**. In other words, she was becoming more sick. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “getting worse” or “worsening”
5:27-28 lhrl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge ἀκούσασα τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ἐλθοῦσα ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄπισθεν, ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ & ἔλεγεν γὰρ, ὅτι ἐὰν ἅψωμαι κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:27](../05/27.md) and [5:28](../05/28.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include what the woman is thinking before she acts based on what she is thinking. Alternate translation: “heard the things about Jesus. She was saying, ‘If I touch just his clothes, I will be saved.’ So, having come up behind him in the crowd, she touched his cloak.”
5:27 z2hg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ περὶ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that the woman heard **the things** that Jesus had done to heal people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that Jesus had healed people”
5:27 qitt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθοῦσα 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone up”
5:27 lfzg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark does not explain why she touched the edge of his cloak. Since Mark does explain it in the next verse, you should not explain its meaning here.
5:28 alc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the woman touched Jesus’ clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is why she did that:” or “She did that because”
5:28 ru14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγεν & ὅτι ἐὰν ἅψωμαι κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “she was saying that if she could touch just his clothes, she would be saved”
5:28 ob1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔλεγεν 1 Here Mark implies that the woman was **saying** these things to herself or that she was thinking these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “she was saying to herself” or “she was thinking”
5:28 krs2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἅψωμαι κἂν 1 Here, the word **just** indicates that the woman thinks that, to be healed, she does not need to do anything more than **touch** Jesus’ clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all I do is touch” or “I can just touch”
5:28 wge2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσομαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could indicate that is God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God will save me” or “he will save me”
5:29 ku4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξηράνθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “dried up” or “ceased”
5:29 c1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, you could indicate that is God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God had healed her from the disease” or “Jesus had healed her from the disease”
5:29 fszt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how she was afflicted”
5:30 zk5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς ἐν ἑαυτῷ 1 Here Mark means that Jesus **realized** that power had gone out from him because of something inside him, not because he saw or felt what the woman had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having sensed” or “having felt inside”
5:30 ma2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν 1 When the woman touched Jesus, Jesus felt **the power** going out from him to heal her. However, this does not mean that Jesus no longer had that **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the power from him effecting somebody else” or “the power from him healing someone”
5:30 m1si rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν ἐξελθοῦσαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that something powerful had happened because of him” or “that how powerful he was had accomplished something”
5:31 pgpc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βλέπεις τὸν ὄχλον συνθλίβοντά σε 1 By saying this, the disciples were implying that anyone could have touched Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You see the crowd pressing around you, so any one of them might have touched you”
5:31 t31q καὶ λέγεις, τίς μου ἥψατο? 1 Here, the disciples could be: (1) making a statement that quotes Jesus’ question. Alternate translation: “and you are asking, ‘Who touched me?’” (2) asking a rhetorical question that implies that Jesus’ question is unreasonable. Alternate translation: “so why do you say, ‘Who touched me?’”
5:31 qfp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces what Jesus asked in contrast to the situation that he was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but” or “yet”
5:31 cxmk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγεις, τίς μου ἥψατο 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you ask who touched you.”
5:31 l40w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony λέγεις 1 Here the disciples repeat what Jesus said to show that they think this is an unreasonable or silly question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you still say” or “for some reason you say”
5:32 ts64 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces what Jesus did in contrast to what the disciples suggested he do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But” or “Despite that,”
5:32 x9gw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο ποιήσασαν 1 The pronoun **this** refers to touching Jesus’ clothing. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to this action more directly. Alternate translation: “having touched his robe” or “having done the touching”
5:33 e8xt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα, εἰδυῖα ὃ γέγονεν αὐτῇ, ἦλθεν 1 Here, the phrase **having known what had happened to her** gives a reason for why the woman behaved as she did. It could most specifically give the reason for why: (1) she **came** to Jesus. Alternate translation: “having become afraid and trembling, came because she knew what had happened to her” (2) she was **afraid** and **trembling**. Alternate translation: “having become afraid and trembling because she knew what had happened to her, came”
5:33 r3a0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys φοβηθεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with **and**. The word **trembling** tells how the woman physically experienced being **afraid**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “trembling with fear” or “trembling fearfully”
5:33 uefx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθεν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
5:33 fxxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσέπεσεν αὐτῷ 1 In the Jesus’ culture, falling down before a person was a way to honor a greater person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a similar action from your culture, or you could explain what falling down means. Alternate translation: “prostrated herself before him” or “bowed down to him in respect”
5:33 b6kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “truthfully told him everything”
5:33 b39m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 Here Mark implies that the woman told **the whole truth** about what she had done and what happened to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the whole truth about what she had done” or “the whole truth about the events that had just occurred”
5:34 k971 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
5:34 gbk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θυγάτηρ 1 Here Jesus calls the woman **Daughter** to indicate that he cares for her. The word also implies that the woman was younger than Jesus. The woman was not actually Jesus’ daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form of address that an older person would use to show that they care for a younger person. Alternate translation: “My friend” or “Dear woman”
5:34 unp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you believed, and that has caused you to be saved”
5:34 sbvm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Jesus speaks of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that her faith was the necessary condition for the healing that she received from God. Alternate translation: “because of your faith, you have been saved”
5:34 lfh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρήνην 1 This is a way of saying goodbye and giving a blessing at the same time. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “As you go, do not worry anymore,”
5:34 h342 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς εἰρήνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “peacefully”
5:34 d8uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἴσθι ὑγιὴς ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no longer have your affliction” or “be healthy, without your affliction”
5:34 sgvs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγός σου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from how you were afflicted”
5:35 n9nm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus was **still** saying what Mark recorded in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “He still saying those things” or “He still speaking to the woman”
5:35 gyx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “they go”
5:35 ahf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they came”
5:35 cxr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔρχονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to people who were at Jairus’ house. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to them more directly. Alternate translation: “people come”
5:35 sau6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 Here, **the synagogue ruler** represents the house of the synagogue ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the synagogue ruler’s home”
5:35 iftj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
5:35 t2wd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 The people from Jairus’ house are using the question form to suggest how Jairus should behave. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is no need to bother the teacher further.” or “It is useless to bother the teacher further!”
5:35 vqt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 This question implies that Jesus will not be able to do anything to help, since the girl is dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Since there is nothing more that Jesus can do for you, why make him come to your house”
5:36 r1jw παρακούσας 1 Here, the word translated **having overheard** could mean that Jesus: (1) listened in on the conversation between the messengers and Jairus. Alternate translation: “having listened in on” (2) ignored what the messengers told Jairus. Alternate translation: “having ignored” or “having disregarded”
5:36 edb0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον λαλούμενον 1 Here, **word** represents what the messengers said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what they spoke” or “the news they brought”
5:36 wuej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λαλούμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the people who came from Jairus’ house. Alternate translation: “that those people spoke”
5:36 p60b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
5:36 q8at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πίστευε 1 Here Jesus implies that Jairus, the **synagogue ruler**, should **believe** in Jesus, specifically that Jesus can help his daughter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “believe in me” or “believe that I can save your daughter”
5:37 g616 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀφῆκεν οὐδένα μετ’ αὐτοῦ συνακολουθῆσαι, εἰ μὴ τὸν Πέτρον, καὶ Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he allowed only Peter and James and John the brother of James to accompany him”
5:37 kk98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Jairus, the synagogue ruler, went with Jesus as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “him and the synagogue ruler” or “him and Jairus”
5:37 pshl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰακώβου 1 Mark never says whether **James** or **John** was older, but he mentions **James** first, which could imply that he was the older brother. If you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **John** was younger. See how you expressed the idea in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “the younger brother of James”
5:38 nyix rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχονται & θεωρεῖ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came … he saw”
5:38 nb2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχονται 1 Here Mark implies that Peter, James, John, and Jairus were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they come” or “Jesus, Jairus, and the three disciples come”
5:38 pcgi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
5:38 flu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys θόρυβον, καὶ κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two terms connected with **and**. The phrase **weeping and much wailing** explains what actions created the **commotion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “a commotion, including weeping and much wailing” or “a commotion caused by weeping and much wailing”
5:38 u8ze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κλαίοντας καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολλά 1 The terms **weeping** and **much wailing** mean similar things. Mark is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “very much mourning” or “a great deal of weeping”
5:39 y5kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
5:39 atr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? τὸ παιδίον οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the first sentence describes. Alternate translation: “The child did not die but is sleeping. So, why are you being disturbed and weeping?”
5:39 a3ih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί θορυβεῖσθε καὶ κλαίετε? 1 Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the people who were at the house. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Stop being disturbed and weeping.” or “This is not a time to be disturbed and weeping!”
5:39 p5ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are you making a commotion” or “are you being noisy”
5:39 t35h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular θορυβεῖσθε 1 Because Jesus is speaking to many people in the house, the word **you** is plural.
5:39 dzrk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ παιδίον 1 Here, the word **child** refers to a very young woman. Mark clarifies in [5:42](../05/42.md) that she was about 12 years old. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to a girl who is about this age. Alternate translation: “The young girl”\n
5:40 w0f0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense παραλαμβάνει & εἰσπορεύεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “took along … he entered”
5:40 g8k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark is referring to the three disciples (Peter, James, and John) whom Jesus took with him (see [5:37](../05/37.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the three disciples”
5:41 kkqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
5:41 hx3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate ταλιθὰ, κοῦμ! ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον τὸ κοράσιον, σοὶ λέγω ἔγειρε! 1 The phrase **Talitha, koum** is an Aramaic phrase. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he explained what it meant: **Little girl, I say to you, arise**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “‘Talitha, koum!’ which is Aramaic for, ‘Little girl, I say to you, arise.’”
5:41 igcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which we translate as,”
5:41 p3rp σοὶ λέγω 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell the **child**. Use a natural form in your language for emphasizing the importance of a statement. Alternate translation: “listen to this:”
5:42 lfi6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ εὐθὺς ἀνέστη τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει, ἦν γὰρ ἐτῶν δώδεκα & καὶ ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ 1 In this verse, Mark introduces some extra information about the **little girl**: **she was 12 years** old. Consider where you might include this information and how you might introduce it. Alternate translation: “And immediately the little girl, who was 12 years, rose up and was walking, and they were immediately astonished with great amazement” or “And immediately the little girl rose up and was walking, and they were immediately astonished with great amazement. Now the little girl was 12 years.”
5:42 edfv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνέστη 1 Here, the phrase **rose up** indicates both that the girl came back to life and that she stood up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came back to life and got up”
5:42 j8lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation that indicates that the **little girl** was old enough to walk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “she was able to walk because” or “as a matter of act,”
5:42 pt5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦν & ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 Here Mark means that the **little girl** was **12 years** old. Use whatever form your language commonly uses to indicate how old someone is. Alternate translation: “she had lived 12 years” or “she was 12 years of age”
5:42 m49c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they immediately marveled”
5:42 p1dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστησαν εὐθὺς ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ 1 Here, the phrase **astonished with great amazement** means that they were extremely astonished. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were immediately extremely astonished” or “they were immediately totally amazed”
5:42 atv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκστάσει μεγάλῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **amazement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and greatly amazed”
5:43 po7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοῖς & ἵνα μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them, ‘No one must know about this’”
5:43 wcr2 μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο 1 Alternate translation: “they should let no one know about this”
5:43 n29k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he said, ‘Something should be given to her to eat’”
5:43 j8ro rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθῆναι αὐτῇ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that would be the girl’s parents. Alternate translation: “her parents should give her something”
6:intro kl7n 0 # Mark 6 General Notes\n\nMatthew: 14\nLuke: 4, 9\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n2. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee (1:14–8:26)\n * Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1–8:26)\n * Jesus teaches in his hometown (6:1–6)\n * Jesus sends out the Twelve (6:7–13)\n * Herod hears about Jesus (6:14–16)\n * Flashback: Herod executes John the Baptist (6:17–29)\n * Jesus feeds 5,000 men (6:30–44)\n * Jesus walks on water (6:45–52)\n * Jesus heals people in the region of Gennesaret (6:53–56)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Jesus’ instructions on how to travel\n\nJesus instructs the disciples not to bring money, food, or extra clothing with them when they travel and preach the good news. Instead, he wants the disciples to rely on the hospitality of people they visit. Make sure that your translation indicates that the disciples should not pack money, food, or extra clothing because they will be staying with people who welcome and provide for them.\n\n### Herod and Herodias\n\nThe man named “King Herod” ([6:14](../06/14.md)) ruled over the area to the northwest of the Sea of Galilee, which is where Jesus spent much of his ministry. Herodias was married to Herod’s brother Philip, and the two of them had a daughter. However, Herodias divorced Philip and married Herod, who had also divorced his previous wife. Since the Jewish law condemned anyone who married his brother’s wife while his brother was still alive (see [Leviticus 20:21](../lev/20/21.md)), John the Baptist rebuked Herod for doing this. It was in response to this rebuke that Herod had John the Baptist put in prison and eventually executed. Make sure that your translation accurately refers to the relationships between Herod, Herodias, and Herodias’ daughter.\n\n### The miracle of multiplying food\n\nIn [6:30–44](../06/30.md), Mark tells a story in which Jesus provides 5,000 men with food. They were in a place where no people lived, and all the food that Jesus and his disciples had were five loaves of bread and two fish. Despite that, Jesus used the five loaves of bread and the two fish to feed everyone who was there. Mark does not tell us exactly how Jesus did this, but he does say that there were more leftovers than what they started with. Your translation should not explain how Jesus multiplied the food, but it should be clear that he did a miracle.\n\n### The miracle of walking on water\n\nIn [6:45–52](../06/45.md), Mark tells a story in which Jesus walks on top of the Sea of Galilee, even though there was a storm. When Jesus climbs into the boat that the disciples were in, the storm miraculously stops. Your translation should not explain exactly how Jesus walked on the water, but it should be clear that Jesus walking on the water and the storm stopping were both miracles.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The flashback to John’s death\n\nIn this chapter, Mark includes a story that happened before the stories that appear before and after it in his narrative. Previously, Mark narrates how Jesus sent out the Twelve ([6:7–13](../06/07.md)). Then, he describes how people, and especially Herod Antipas, respond to Jesus (see [6:14–16](../06/14.md)). Then, to explain how Herod responded to Jesus, Mark includes a story that happened earlier. This type of storytelling is called a flashback. Here, the flashback tells about how John the Baptist died (see [6:17–29](../06/17.md)). In [6:30](../06/30.md), Mark returns to the main narrative and tells what happened after the events recorded in [6:7–13](../06/07.md). Make sure that you use a form that shows your readers that [6:17–29](../06/17.md) is a flashback that describes something that happened previously, and [6:30](../06/30.md) continues with the main narrative. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n\n### Singular and plural forms of “you”\n\nMany of the forms of “you” in this chap
6:1 mi7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Later,” or “Then”
6:1 lpci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν & ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went** or “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he came out … goes”
6:1 jcu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν 1 Here, the word **there** refers to the house of Jairus, the synagogue ruler. His house was in the town of Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from Jairus’ house” or “from Capernaum”
6:1 vf56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **his hometown** refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his hometown, Nazareth”
6:1 t7mm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἀκολουθοῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “were following”
6:2 qu8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Jesus and what he said and did. Alternate translation: “he astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying” or “what he said astonished many of the ones hearing him, who were saying”
6:2 uf10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ πολλοὶ ἀκούοντες 1 Here, the phrase translated **the many ones hearing him** could refer to: (1) the **many** people who were **hearing him**. In this case, all of the **many** people were astonished. Alternate translation: “all the many people hearing him” (2) **many** of the people who were **hearing him**. In this case, not all of the people were astonished. Alternate translation: “many of the ones hearing him”
6:2 xeh7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they said”
6:2 bpq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτῳ ταῦτα, καὶ τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τοιαῦται διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ γινόμεναι? 1 The people in Jesus’ hometown are using the question form to express their surprise that Jesus has **wisdom** and can do **miracles**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We are surprised to see this one doing these things, and we are surprised that this one has been given the wisdom and such miracles happening by his hands.” or “We have no idea where these things that this one does are from, and we do not know what the wisdom that has been given to this one is, and such miracles happening by his hands!”
6:2 s2jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πόθεν τούτῳ ταῦτα 1 Here, the phrase **From where to this one {are} these things** asks about the source from which **this one**, Jesus, was able to do **these things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What is the source of these things for this one” or “How is this one able to do these things”
6:2 cpf0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τοιαῦται 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wisdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how is he as wise as he has been enabled to be, and what are these miracles”
6:2 y4xj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “that someone has given to this one”
6:2 insz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ 1 These people are using **hands** to represent Jesus acting powerfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by him” or “through his actions”
6:3 s3wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τέκτων, ὁ υἱὸς τῆς Μαρίας, καὶ ἀδελφὸς Ἰακώβου, καὶ Ἰωσῆτος, καὶ Ἰούδα, καὶ Σίμωνος? καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 The people are using the question form to show that they know Jesus and his family. They mean that Jesus is just an ordinary person. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “He is only a carpenter, the son of Mary and a brother of James, Joseph, Judas, and Simon. His sisters are here with us.” or “He is only a carpenter! He is the son of Mary a brother of James and Joseph and Judas and Simon! His sisters are right here with us!”
6:3 no4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ τέκτων 1 The word **carpenter** refers to someone who builds things with wood. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of worker, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the man who builds with wood” or “the construction worker”
6:3 i9qi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship ἀδελφὸς 1 Jesus was the older **brother** of these men. They were sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, Jesus was actually their half-brother. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “older brother,” you could use it here.
6:3 tlub rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰωσῆτος & Ἰούδα & Σίμωνος 1 The words **Joses**, **Judas**, and **Simon** are the names of men.
6:3 cxgx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ 1 These were Jesus' younger **sisters**. They were daughteres of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-sisters. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger sister,” you could use it here.
6:3 d2g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Mark speaks as if Jesus were a lump or rock that the people in Jesus’ hometown were stumbling on. He means that these people were offended by him and rejected him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were offended by him” or “they did not listen to him”
6:3 m412 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they were stumbling on him”
6:4 b42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “A prophet is only without honor”
6:4 l436 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν & ἄτιμος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “has honor” or “is always honored”\n
6:4 yg9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄτιμος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **honor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “dishonored” or “treated dishonorably”
6:4 y2oa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγγενεῦσιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses three terms that refer to people who know the **prophet** well. The list starts with the broadest category (**hometown**) and ends with the most specific category (**his house**). If you have three terms that refer to different groups of people who know a person, you could use them here. Alternatively, if it would be clearer for your readers, you could use one or two terms. Alternate translation: “except among his relatives” or “in his hometown and among his family”
6:4 mgbp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses the phrase **in his house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “among his father, mother, or siblings”
6:5 qajx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν, εἰ μὴ ὀλίγοις ἀρρώστοις, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας, ἐθεράπευσεν 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only miracles he was able to do there were healing some sick people, having laid his hands on them”
6:5 ystk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐδύνατο ἐκεῖ ποιῆσαι οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν 1 The words translated **not** and **any** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “he was able to do not even one miracle there”
6:6-7 swqh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν.\nκαὶ περιῆγεν τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ διδάσκων & καὶ προσκαλεῖται τοὺς δώδεκα, καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν δύο δύο, καὶ ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων 1 Here, the clause **he was going around the villages teaching** could be: (1) the end of the story about Jesus visiting his hometown. Alternate translation: “And he was amazed because of their unbelief, and he was going around the villages in a circle teaching. And he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits” (2) the beginning of the story about how Jesus sent out the twelve disciples. Alternate translation: “And he was amazed because of their unbelief. And he was going around the villages in a circle teaching, and he calls the Twelve and began to send them out two by two, and he was giving them authority over the unclean spirits”
6:6 e1bb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐθαύμασεν διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **their unbelief**. Alternate translation: “their unbelief amazed him”\n
6:6 j8mo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they did not believe”
6:6 h8f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς κώμας 1 Here Mark is referring to **the villages** in a specific area. He probably means the area near Nazareth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these villages are in a specific region. Alternate translation: “the villages of that region”
6:6 fs98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς κώμας, κύκλῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in a circle** indicates that Jesus went from village to village in the general pattern of a **circle**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the villages in a circular pattern” or “around the villages, one by one,”
6:7 tdsp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “After that,”
6:7 kqa9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense προσκαλεῖται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he called”
6:7 fd56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤρξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστέλλειν 1 Here, the phrase **began to send them out** indicates that Jesus prepared them for when he would **send them out**. The **Twelve** do not actually leave on their mission until [5:12](../05/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prepared to send them out” or “began to get them ready to send them out”
6:7 d6sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δύο δύο 1 Here, the phrase **two by two** means that Jesus sent out **the Twelve** in six groups with **two** disciples in each group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in pairs” or “in sets of two”
6:7 ldbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν ἀκαθάρτων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of authority, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he was empowering them to control the unclean spirits”
6:8-9 pydl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge καὶ παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην χαλκόν & ἀλλὰ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδάλια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:8](../06/08.md) and [6:9](../06/09.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to put all the negative and positive commands together. Alternate translation: “and he commanded them that they should take nothing for the road—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt—and, ‘You may not wear two tunics.’However, he allowed them to take a staff and to put on sandals.”
6:8-9 arcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον, μὴ ἄρτον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην χαλκόν & ἀλλὰ ὑποδεδεμένους σανδάλια, καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation for all these commands. Alternate translation: “them, ‘Take nothing for the road except only a staff—no bread, no bag, no money in the belt—but having put on sandals, and you may not wear two tunics.’”
6:8 k5hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς ὁδὸν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μόνον 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only thing they should take for the road was a staff”
6:8 r5so rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁδὸν 1 Here, **road** represents a journey. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the journey”
6:8 t9a2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μὴ ἄρτον 1 Mark is using **bread** to represent any food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nothing to eat”
6:8 ykr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πήραν 1 The term **bag** means something a traveler would use to carry things that were needed on a journey. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “knapsack”
6:8 rm8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ζώνην 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would often wrap their money up in long strips of cloth and then tie them around their waists as belts. This was a way to keep the money safe while the people were traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “in their money bag” or “to have with you as you travel”
6:8 y56y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τὴν ζώνην 1 The word **belt** represents belts in general, not one particular belt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their belts”
6:9 p4hd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations καὶ μὴ ἐνδύσησθε δύο χιτῶνας 1 If you preserved the indirect quotation in the previous clauses, it may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here also. Alternate translation: “and not wearing two tunics”
6:9 g5gq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δύο χιτῶνας 1 Here Jesus implies that they should bring only one tunic instead of **two**. In other words, they should not bring an extra one in case they needed it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second tunic” or “a spare tunic”
6:10 cbln rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσέλθητε εἰς οἰκίαν 1 Here Jesus implies that they **enter** this **house** as a guest who has been invited to stay there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you enter into a house as a guest” or “you are invited to stay at a house”
6:10 icco rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν 1 Here, the word **there** refers to the city or village that the **house** is in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from that city or village”
6:11 uh18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὃς ἂν τόπος μὴ δέξηται 1 Here, **place** represents represents the people who live in that place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when the people in any place do not receive”
6:11 oa4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐκπορευόμενοι 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “coming” instead of **going**. Alternate translation: “coming out”
6:11 b2kb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκτινάξατε τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 1 This action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a house or city to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider referring to it here, or you could explain the meaning of the action. Alternate translation: “wash the dirt of that place off your hands” or “shake off the dust that is under your feet to sever your relationship with that place and”
6:11 njlk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Here Jesus implies that the **testimony** indicates that these people are in danger of being punished by God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for a testimony that they will be punished”
6:11 q73q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to testify”
6:11 pkdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Most ancient manuscripts end the verse with the words **for a testimony against them**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts include another sentence after these words: “Truly I say to you, it will be more tolerable for the land of Sodom and Gomorrah in the day of judgment than for that city.” This sentence was probably added from [Matthew 10:15](../mat/10/15.md). If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT.
6:12 qkz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
6:12 hqco rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐκήρυξαν ἵνα μετανοῶσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they proclaimed, ‘You should repent’”
6:12 gkv2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns μετανοῶσιν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “everyone should repent” or “men and women should repent”
6:13 bf3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἤλειφον ἐλαίῳ πολλοὺς ἀρρώστους 1 In Jesus’ culture, **anointing** people **with oil** was both a simple medical treatment and also a way to ask God to show favor to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what **anointing** people **with oil** means. Alternate translation: “anointing many sick people with oil to help them” or “anointing many sick people with oil to show God’s blessing”
6:14 ykou rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης 1 Here Mark introduces **King Herod** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Now the ruler over that area was King Herod. And he heard about Jesus”\n
6:14 btoi rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Sometime later,”
6:14 lyiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρῴδης, φανερὸν γὰρ ἐγένετο τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because his name became known, King Herod heard about him”
6:14 rzor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **name** represents the person or news about that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he” or “stories about him”
6:14 sx0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were saying that John the Baptist had been raised from the dead, and because of this the powers worked in him”
6:14 qzxu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔλεγον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a form that refers to people in general. Alternate translation: “many were saying” or “people were saying”
6:14 ylqm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἔλεγον 1 Some ancient manuscripts read **they were saying**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “he was saying.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
6:14 wixk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 These people are implying that Jesus is actually **John the Baptist**, who **has been raised from the dead** and now goes by the name Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This man Jesus is actually John the Baptist raised from the dead” or “John the Baptist has been raised from the dead and is now called Jesus”
6:14 vxo7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται 1 Here, the word** raised** refers to someone who died coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has been restored to life”
6:14 ly7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Ἰωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐγήγερται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, these people could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God has raised John the Baptist” (2) John himself did it. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist has risen”
6:14 wbgy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 These people are using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are dead. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “from among the dead people” or “from the corpses”
6:14 s0le rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the phrase **because of this** introduces the result of what these people think about John being raised from the dead. They think that Jesus has powers because he has already been raised from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he has been raised,”
6:14 emjv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυνάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here these people speak as if **the powers** were people that could work in Jesus. They mean that Jesus is powerful and can do powerful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has his powers” or “he is very powerful”
6:15 n8sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐστίν; ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον, ὅτι προφήτης, ὡς εἷς τῶν προφητῶν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “But others were saying that he was Elijah. But others were saying that he was a prophet, like one of the prophets”
6:15 s5cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis προφήτης 1 These people are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a prophet”
6:15 xnin rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἷς τῶν προφητῶν 1 Here these people are referring to the famous **prophets** who lived many years earlier. There are many stories in the Old Testament about the amazing things these **prophets** did and said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these specific **prophets** more explicitly. Alternate translation: “one of the famous prophets from the Scriptures” or “one of the ancient prophets”
6:16 a5hb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα, Ἰωάννην οὗτος ἠγέρθη 1 Here, the phrase **this one** refers directly back to **{The one} whom I beheaded, John**. Herod expresses the idea in this way to introduce the person he is talking about and then explain what he thinks has happened to that person. If stating the topic and then referring back to it with the phrase **this one** would be redundant in your language, you could omit the redundant information. Alternate translation: “The one whom I beheaded, John, has been raised”
6:16 tc0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit 1 Herod is implying that Jesus is actually **John**, who **has been raised** and now goes by the name Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “This man Jesus is actually the one whom I beheaded, John, who has been raised” or “The one whom I beheaded, John, this one has been raised and is now called Jesus”
6:16 ym2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα 1 Here Herod implies that he had his soldiers behead John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “my soldiers beheaded” or “I had my soldiers behead”
6:16 oidb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὗτος ἠγέρθη 1 See how you expressed the similar phrase in [6:14](../06/14.md). Alternate translation: “has been restored to life”
6:16 n6nq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὗτος ἠγέρθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Herod could be implying that: (1) God did it. Alternate translation: “God has raised this one” (2) John himself did it. Alternate translation: “this one has risen”
6:17-18 recp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν & ἔλεγεν γὰρ ὁ Ἰωάννης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:17](../06/17.md) and [6:18](../06/18.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reasons why Herod **seized John and bound him in prison** before stating that he did those things. Alternate translation: “For Herod had married Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip. Then, John was saying to Herod, ‘It is not lawful for you to have the wife of your brother.’ So, because of Herodias, Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison.”
6:17 ojtd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces background information that tells about how John died. This background information continues in [6:18–29](../06/18.md). In your translation, present this information in a way that makes it clear that this is background information, not the next event in the story. Alternate translation: “Now sometime earlier,” or “By this time, John had already died. Here is what happened:”
6:17 kphw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these elements, since the second half of the verse gives reasons for the result that the first half of the verse describes. Alternate translation: “Herod married Herodias, the wife of his brother Philip. Because of her, Herod himself, having sent, seized John and bound him in prison”
6:17 vpr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης, ἀποστείλας ἐκράτησεν τὸν Ἰωάννην, καὶ ἔδησεν αὐτὸν ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Here Mark implies that **Herod** sent his soldiers to do these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Herod himself, having sent his soldiers, had them seize John and bind him in prison”
6:17 wail rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Ἡρῴδης 1 Mark uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that **Herod** was the one did these things. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “it was Herod who” or “indeed Herod”
6:17 gimy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Ἡρῳδιάδα, τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν 1 Here Mark introduces **Herodias** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a woman named Herodias, who was the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her”
6:17 ywv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμησεν 1 Here Matthew implies that Herod married Herodias after she divorced Philip, Herod’s brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whom he married after she divorced his brother Philip” or “who had been the wife of his brother Philip, because he married her after she divorced Philip”
6:17 sf6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φιλίππου, τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The word **Philip** is the name of a man. This is not the same Philip who was an evangelist in the book of Acts or the Philip who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples.
6:17 szok rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 It is not certain whether **Philip** was older or younger than Herod, but it is slightly more likely that he was older. So, if you have to use a form that refers to an older or younger brother, you could state that **Philip** was older. Alternate translation: “his older brother”
6:18 a46w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Herod put John in prison. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason, or you could leave For untranslated. Alternate translation: “He did that because”
6:18 e2ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Herod that it was not lawful for him to have the wife of his brother”
6:18 psjw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 See how you translated **brother** in [6:17](../06/17.md). Alternate translation: “of your older brother”
6:19-20 lj6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge ἡ δὲ Ἡρῳδιὰς ἐνεῖχεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο & ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης ἐφοβεῖτο τὸν Ἰωάννην, εἰδὼς αὐτὸν ἄνδρα δίκαιον καὶ ἅγιον, καὶ συνετήρει αὐτόν; καὶ ἀκούσας αὐτοῦ, πολλὰ ἠπόρει, καὶ ἡδέως αὐτοῦ ἤκουεν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:19](../06/19.md) and [6:20](../06/20.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to include the reasons why Herodias **was not able** to kill John before stating that she was not able to kill him. Alternate translation: “But Herodias was angry with him and was wanting to kill him. But Herod was fearing John, knowing him {to be} a righteous and holy man, and he was keeping him safe, and having heard him, he was greatly perplexed, yet he was listening to him gladly. So, Herodias was not able to kill him”
6:19 x35v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἤθελεν αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι 1 Here Mark implies that Herodias wanted to send someone to **kill** John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “was wanting to have him killed” or “was wanting to have Herod’s soldiers kill him”
6:19 ujer rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces Herodias could actually do in contrast with what she wanted to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “but”
6:19 ft31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἠδύνατο 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “she was not able to kill him”
6:20 lmbc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Herodias was not able to kill John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for something, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “which was because” or “since”
6:20 k13z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνετήρει αὐτόν 1 Here Mark implies that Herod kept John **safe** while he was in jail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he was keeping him safe in prison”
6:20 zcw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants πολλὰ ἠπόρει 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **he was greatly perplexed**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “he was doing many things.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
6:20 kciv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πολλὰ ἠπόρει 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was what John said. Alternate translation: “what John said perplexed him greatly”
6:20 l3mo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 4 Here, the word **and** introduces how Herod listened to John in contrast with how he was **perplexed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “yet”
6:21 l96u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου 1 Here Mark implies that it was **an opportune day** for Herodias to convince Herod to have John executed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a good opportunity for Herodias to kill John having come” or “a day having come when it was a good time for Herodias to have Herod execute John”
6:21 m54q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δεῖπνον ἐποίησεν 1 Here Mark implies that Herod had his servants make **a dinner**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had his servants make a dinner”
6:21 vg8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοῖς γενεσίοις αὐτοῦ 1 In some cultures, people celebrate a **birthday**, the day that someone was born. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of celebration, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “for his birthday celebration” or “for celebrations on the anniversary of his birth”
6:21 kxru rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **his great ones** refers to the important people in Herod’s court. They were probably high-ranking officials who served under Herod. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “his high-ranking courtiers” or “the important people in his court”
6:21 s0y7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς πρώτοις τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 Here, Mark refers to important or respected people as if they were **first**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the respected of Galilee” or “the significant ones of Galilee”
6:21 eouo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς πρώτοις 1 Mark is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean first people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the first people” or “for the people who were first”
6:22 mjaj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants καὶ εἰσελθούσης τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος, καὶ ὀρχησαμένης καὶ ἀρεσάσης τῷ Ἡρῴδῃ καὶ τοῖς συνανακειμένοις & ὁ βασιλεὺς 1 Here Mark introduces Herod’s **daughter** as a new character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “a young woman entered. She was his daughter, of Herodias. She danced and pleased Herod and the ones reclining to eat with him, so the king”
6:22 qd9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος 1 Some ancient manuscripts read **his daughter, of Herodias**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the daughter of Herodias herself.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT.
6:22 a1d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς θυγατρὸς αὐτοῦ Ἡρῳδιάδος 1 The phrase translated **his daughter, of Herodias** could indicate that: (1) the young woman, who is not named, was the **daughter** of **Herodias** and so also Herod’s step-daughter. Alternate translation: “the daughter of Herodias, Herod’s step-daughter” (2) the young woman, named Herodias, was the **daughter** of Herod. She had the same name as the woman Herod had married. Alternate translation: “Herod’s daughter Herodias”
6:22 tni8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς συνανακειμένοις 1 In Herod’s culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, at a table when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “the ones sitting down to eat with him” or “the ones eating with him”
6:22 cxf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν & τῷ κορασίῳ, αἴτησόν με ὃ ἐὰν θέλῃς, καὶ δώσω σοι 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “told the girl that she should him whatever she desired, and he would give it to her”
6:22 mpv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ κορασίῳ 1 Here, the word **girl** refers to a woman who has reached puberty but who is still young, probably between 12 and 20 years old. Use a word in your language that refers generally to a young woman who has reached puberty. Alternate translation: “to the young lady”
6:22 jmdl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular αἴτησόν & θέλῃς & σοι 1 Because Herod is speaking to the girl, the command **Ask** and the word **you** throughout this verse are singular.
6:23 tvwj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτῇ, ὅτι ἐάν με αἰτήσῃς, δώσω σοι, ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “her that if she asked him, he would give it to her, up to half of his kingdom”
6:23 er6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular αἰτήσῃς & σοι 1 Because Herod is speaking to the girl, the word **you** is singular throughout this verse.
6:23 vwbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἕως ἡμίσους τῆς βασιλείας μου 1 Herod says **up to half of my kingdom** here as an overstatement for emphasis. He means that he will definitely give the young woman what she asks for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Herod is making an overstatement, or you could express the idea more generally. Alternate translation: “even if it were up to half of my kingdom” or “no matter how valuable” or “even if it is very difficult to give”
6:24 fn58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθοῦσα 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “having come out”
6:24 b57y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς, τί αἰτήσωμαι? ἡ δὲ εἶπεν, τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος 1 It may be more natural in your language to have indirect quotations here. Alternate translation: “she asked her mother what she should ask. And her mother said that she should ask for the head of John the Baptist”
6:24 wlxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ μητρὶ αὐτῆς 1 Here Mark implies that **her mother** is Herodias, Herod’s wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to Herodias, her mother”
6:24 skbr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος 1 The mother is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “You should ask for the head of John the Baptist”
6:24 v8ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ βαπτίζοντος 1 Here the mother is implying that the daughter should ask King Herod to behead **John the Baptist** and then present his severed **head** to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “The head of John Baptist after he has been beheaded” or “The head of John the Baptist severed from his body”
6:25 caz0 μετὰ σπουδῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **haste**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “quickly” or “hurriedly”
6:25 v2q6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγουσα 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and she said”
6:25 ap2w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θέλω ἵνα ἐξαυτῆς δῷς μοι ἐπὶ πίνακι τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἰωάννου τοῦ Βαπτιστοῦ 1 Here the woman implies that she wants Herod to have John killed by having his **head** cut off and brought to her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I desire that you would have one of your soldiers at once behead John the Baptist and then give me his head here on a platter”
6:25 icqi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πίνακι 1 A **platter** is a large, flat serving dish. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of dish, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a tray” or “a large serving plate”
6:26 lh9k περίλυπος γενόμενος 1 Alternate translation: “feeling very sorry”
6:26 c1gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμένους 1 Here Mark indicates two reasons why Herod kept his word. First, he had made **oaths** that he did not want to break. Second, he had promised in front of **the ones reclining to eat with him**, and it would be embarrassing and shameful to break his promise when everyone had heard it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these reasons more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he had used oaths and because the ones reclining to eat with him had heard what he promised”
6:26 gtal rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς συνανακειμένους 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would usually recline, or lay on one side, at a table when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. See how you translated this phrase in [6:22](../06/22.md). Alternate translation: “the ones sitting down to eat with him” or “the ones eating with him”
6:26 mu7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἀθετῆσαι αὐτήν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **refuse**. Alternate translation: “had to allow it” or “was compelled to do what she asked”
6:27 xmyz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ἀποστείλας & σπεκουλάτορα, ἐπέταξεν ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause describes what the king **commanded** before he **sent** the executioner. Alternate translation: “having commanded an executioner to bring his head, sent him off”
6:27 kx53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σπεκουλάτορα 1 An **executioner** is a soldier who executes people for his commander. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of soldier, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “one of his soldiers”
6:27 k89i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέγκαι τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 Here Mark implies that Herod commanded the executioner to cut off John’s **head** and then **bring** it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to behead John Baptist and then to bring his head” or “to bring the head of John the Baptist severed from his body”
6:28 jeax rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πίνακι 1 See how you translated the word **platter** in [6:25](../06/25.md). Alternate translation: “a tray” or “a large serving plate”
6:28 a2bs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ κορασίῳ & τὸ κοράσιον 1 See how you translated **girl** in [6:22](../06/22.md). Alternate translation: “to the young lady … the young lady”
6:29 uzl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦλθον 1 Here Mark implies that John’s disciples went to the jail where John had been imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “came to the place where John had been imprisoned”
6:29 k77n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went”
6:30 u01i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces the next major event in the story. This event continues the story about how Jesus sent the twelve apostles out to drive out demons and to preach (see [6:7–13](../06/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **And** untranslated. Make sure that it is clear that Mark is continuing the story from earlier in the chapter. Alternate translation: “Now to return to the story,” or “Now”
6:30 cq4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνάγονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gather together” or “assemble”
6:30 ixz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense συνάγονται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “were gathered together”
6:30 v44x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησαν καὶ ὅσα ἐδίδαξαν 1 The expression **everything, as much as they did and as much as they taught** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “as much as they did and taught”
6:31 o97p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, δεῦτε ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ κατ’ ἰδίαν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, καὶ ἀναπαύσασθε ὀλίγον & ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες πολλοί, καὶ οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the result that the firs sentence describes. Alternate translation: “And the ones coming and the ones going were many, and they were not even having opportunity to eat. Therefore, he says to them, ‘You yourselves, come by yourselves to a desolate place and rest a little while.’”
6:31 vw04 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
6:31 bpmv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ 1 Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that he wants the disciples to come with him. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “As for you”
6:31 vu17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἐρχόμενοι καὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες 1 Here Mark means that many people were visiting the place where Jesus and the disciples were. Many people were visiting and many others were leaving all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the people visiting that place and then leaving” or “the people who were there”
6:31 y7sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐδὲ φαγεῖν εὐκαίρουν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **opportunity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they could not even find time to eat” or “they were so busy that they could not eat”
6:32 dhhr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀπῆλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “they came away”
6:32 exy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῷ πλοίῳ 1 Here, the phrase **the boat** could refer to: (1) a boat, without specifying which one. Alternate translation: “a certain boat” (2) the same boat that Jesus and his disciples used in [5:21](../05/21.md). Alternate translation: “the same boat they had used earlier”
6:33 bi18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἶδον αὐτοὺς ὑπάγοντας, καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν πολλοί 1 The word **many** could go with: (1) just **knew**. Alternate translation: “people saw them leaving, and many people knew” (2) both **saw** and **knew**. Alternate translation: “many saw them leaving and knew”
6:33 yq0y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἶδον 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “some saw” or “people who were there saw”
6:33 b5hj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοί 1 Mark is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean many people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “many people”
6:33 tekx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέγνωσαν 1 Here Mark could be implying that they **knew**: (1) that Jesus and his disciples were the ones who were **leaving**. Alternate translation: “recognized them” (2) where Jesus and disciples were going. Alternate translation: “realized where they were going”
6:33 ec62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo πεζῇ & συνέδραμον ἐκεῖ 1 The expression **on foot** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they ran there together”
6:33 lxrx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ πασῶν τῶν πόλεων 1 Here Matthew refers to the cities near where Jesus and the disciples had been. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “from all the cities in that region” or “from all the nearby cities”
6:34 u25j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξελθὼν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus came out of the boat in which he and the disciples were sailing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having come out of the boat” or “having disembarked”
6:34 t449 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθὼν 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
6:34 jdg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὅτι ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “because they were like sheep not having a shepherd, he had compassion on them”
6:34 sh2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐσπλαγχνίσθη ἐπ’ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he sympathized with”
6:34 j1td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὅτι ἦσαν ὡς πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα 1 Here Mark compares the people who were there to **sheep** who do not have **a shepherd**. Just as **sheep** without **a shepherd** have no one to lead and take care of them, so the people have no one to lead and take care of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of the simile more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because, like sheep without a shepherd, they did not know what to do or where to go”
6:35 sei9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤδη ὥρας πολλῆς γενομένης & ἤδη ὥρα πολλή 1 When Mark says that an **hour** is **much**, he means that it is a time later in the day, probably soon before sunset. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the late afternoon having already arrived …the late afternoon is already here” or “the evening having almost come … the evening is almost here”
6:35 hz4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go προσελθόντες 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone”
6:36 zrnd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς 1 Because the disciples are speaking to Jesus, the command **Send them away** is singular.
6:36 ruhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἀπόλυσον αὐτούς 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “We ask that you send the them away”
6:36 essv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism τοὺς κύκλῳ ἀγροὺς καὶ κώμας 1 Here, Mark is referring to that whole region by naming its two primary parts, the **countryside** and the **villages**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the whole surrounding area”
6:37 cxcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples asked him to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
6:37 odj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they said”
6:37 cts5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀπελθόντες, ἀγοράσωμεν δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους, καὶ δώσομεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν? 1 The disciples are using the question form to show that Jesus’ command is absurd or impossible. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “We cannot go away and buy 200 denarii of bread and give it to them to eat.” or “We could not go away and buy enough bread to give to them to eat even if we had 200 denarii!”
6:37 c65w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δηναρίων διακοσίων ἄρτους 1 Here, the disciples are using the possessive form to describe **bread** that is worth **200 denarii**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “bread worth 200 denarii” or “bread with 200 denarii”
6:37 hs21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney δηναρίων διακοσίων 1 The word **denarii** refers to silver coins, each equivalent to about one day’s wage for a hired worker. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “200 silver coins” or “200 days’ wages”
6:38 rw5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what Jesus says in a contrast with what the disciples just implied about how impossible it would be for them to feed everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,”
6:38 si8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει & λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … they said”
6:38 b90s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτους 1 The word **loaves** refers to loaves of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bread, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
6:38 n83x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπάγετε, ἴδετε 1 Here Jesus commands to the disciples to **Go** to where they kept their food and **See** how much they have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Check your supplies and note what you have” or “Go to where you keep your food and see what is there”
6:38 ssyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γνόντες 1 Here Mark implies that they knew how many loaves of bread they had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having known how many loaves they had”
6:38 d7u5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πέντε καὶ δύο ἰχθύας 1 The disciples are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We have five loaves, and we also have two fish”
6:39 z5pu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι πάντας 1 The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) **all** the people who were there. In this case, Jesus directly commanded the crowd **to recline**. Alternate translation: “he commanded the whole crowd to recline” (2) the disciples, who them told **all** the people who were there **to recline**. In this case, Jesus commands the disciples, who command the crowd. Alternate translation: “he commanded the disciples to have all the people recline”
6:39 dfv0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτοῖς ἀνακλῖναι πάντας, συμπόσια συμπόσια ἐπὶ τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “them all, ‘Recline group by group on the green grass’”
6:39 cys0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνακλῖναι 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would usually **recline**, or lay on one side, when they were eating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the position in which people eat in your culture, or you could just refer to eating. Alternate translation: “to sit down to eat” or “to get ready to eat”
6:39 rr46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom συμπόσια συμπόσια 1 Here, the phrase **group by group** indicates that the people were supposed to sit down in many smaller groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in many smaller groups” or “in separate groups”
6:39 xgb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ 1 Mark describes the **grass** as **green** because it was growing and healthy. If your readers would not be familiar with **green grass**, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the growing grass” or “the healthy grass”\n
6:40 g8dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνέπεσαν 1 See how you translated “recline” in [6:39](../06/39.md). Alternate translation: “they sat down to eat” or “they got ready to eat”
6:40 e4cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ, κατὰ ἑκατὸν καὶ κατὰ πεντήκοντα 1 The phrase **according to hundreds and according to fifties** refers to the number of people in each of the groups. In other words, some groups had a hundred people in them, and other groups had fifty people in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in groups of 100 people and in groups of 50 people” or “group by group, some with 100 people and some with 50 people”
6:40 wls7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρασιαὶ πρασιαὶ 1 See how you translated **group by group** in [6:39](../06/39.md). Alternate translation: “in many smaller groups” or “in separate groups”
6:41 lydm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτους & τοὺς ἄρτους 1 See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread … the large chunks of bread”
6:41 l8q3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 In Jesus’ culture, most people thought that **heaven** was up above the earth. Looking up towards **heaven** was a common posture for someone who was praying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a common posture for prayer in your culture, or you could explain the meaning of this posture. Alternate translation: “having raised his arms in prayer” or “having looked up to heaven to pray”
6:41 b1yq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐλόγησεν 1 Here Mark could be implying that Jesus **blessed**: (1) God for providing the food. Alternate translation: “he blessed God” or “he praised God” (2) the food. Alternate translation: “he blessed the food” or “he asked God to make the food holy”
6:41 yrv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέκλασεν τοὺς ἄρτους 1 Here Mark means that Jesus **broke the loaves** of bread in **pieces** so that they could be served to the crowds. This was a normal practice in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “divided the loaves into servings” or “broke the loaves into smaller pieces”
6:41 uqzs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρισεν πᾶσιν 1 Here Mark implies that Jesus **divided the two fish** as he had divided the **loaves** among everyone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the same way he divided the two fish among all” or “he broke the two fish and gave them to his disciples so that they might set them also before all”
6:41 q3mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πᾶσιν 1 Mark is using the adjective **all** as a noun to mean all the people who were there. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “among all of them”
6:42 szop rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔφαγον πάντες 1 The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they all ate** refers to the crowds who were there. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the crowds all ate” or “all the groups of people ate”
6:42 wi2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages. Alternative translation: “until they were full”
6:43 u5ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κοφίνων 1 The word **baskets** refers to large circular containers that store food or other items. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of container, you could use the name of something similar in your area, or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “boxes” or “containers”
6:43 rw83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κλάσματα & καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἰχθύων 1 Here Mark means that they filled the baskets with the leftovers from the meal, including **broken pieces** of bread and pieces **from the fish**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of broken pieces of bread and parts of fish” or “of leftover pieces of bread and fish”
6:44 deov rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ 1 Mark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that helps the readers understand how amazing what Jesus did was. The word does not introduce another event in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “As for how many people were there,” or “In the end,”
6:44 v4m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοὺς ἄρτους 1 See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “the large chunks of bread”
6:44 t68v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοὺς ἄρτους 1 Mark is using **loaves** to represent all the food that they ate, including the bread and the fish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the food” or “the loaves and the fish”
6:44 u413 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦσαν & πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 Here Mark indicates that **5,000 men** ate the food that Jesus provided. He does not state whether there were other people there. If possible, use a phrase that refers to **5,000 men** without implying whether other people were there. If you must imply or state whether other people were there, you could: (1) indicate that there were women and children there who were not counted. Alternate translation: “were 5,000 men, and there were women and children there too” (2) indicate that only these men ate the food. Alternate translation: “were the 5,000 men who were there”
6:45 s6yp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ εὐθὺς 1 Here, the phrase **And immediately** introduces the next major event in the story. Mark implies that this event began soon after the event he just finished narrating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event. Alternate translation: “Soon after that,”
6:45 o3wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 Here Mark implies that the disciples are sailing **to the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the lake” or “across the sea to the opposite side”
6:45 y3ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town. It was located on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee.
6:45 f3zr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἀπολύει τὸν ὄχλον 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “sent the crowd away”
6:46 hedu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the crowd that had eaten the bread and fish. Alternate translation: “to the crowd” (2) the disciples. Alternate translation: “to the disciples”
6:46 fovx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὸ ὄρος 1 Mark does not clarify what **mountain** this is or how high up it is. If possible, use a general word for a hill or small mountain without indicating one particular place. Alternate translation: “a high place” or “a small mountain”
6:47 ff7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὀψίας γενομένης 1 Mark indicated that it was late in the day earlier in the story (see [6:35](../06/35.md)). Here, he uses a similar phrase but implies that it was later on in the evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes a time later than the time described in [6:35](../06/35.md). Alternate translation: “when it was even later in the evening” or “further into the evening”\n
6:47 wczi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πλοῖον 1 Here Mark implies that **the boat** has the disciples in it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the boat with the disciples inside”
6:48 a0u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν, ἦν γὰρ ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς; καὶ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “that the wind was against them and so they were being tormented as they rowed,”
6:48 bz2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτοὺς βασανιζομένους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the wind. Alternate translation: “the wind tormenting them”
6:48 co87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βασανιζομένους 1 Here Mark refers to how hard the disciples were working to row the boat against the wind as if they were **being tormented**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “working very hard” or “making almost no progress”
6:48 cd73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν 1 When people row a boat, they stick long, flat pieces of wood, called oars, into the water and push or pull so that the boat moves. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of making a boat move, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “as they pushed the boat along with oars” or “as they worked to move the boat”
6:48 k087 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν & ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος αὐτοῖς 1 When**wind** is **against** people in a boat, that means that it is blowing directly opposite to the direction in which the boat is traveling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the wind was opposite to the direction they were sailing” or “the wind was blowing directly against them”
6:48 g7ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown περὶ τετάρτην φυλακὴν τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Here, the phrase **about the fourth watch of the night** refers to the period of time between 3:00 AM and 6:00 AM. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to this period of time. Alternate translation: “in the last part of the night” or “shortly before dawn”
6:48 nbw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “goes” instead of **comes**. Alternate translation: “he goes”
6:48 sjv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense ἔρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came”
6:48 wpbk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης 1 Here Mark means that Jesus was miraculously **walking** on the surface of **the sea**. He did not sink into the water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea”
6:48 b0vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἤθελεν παρελθεῖν αὐτούς 1 Here, the clause **he was wishing to pass by them** could indicate that: (1) Jesus intended to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he intended to pass them by” (2) it looked like Jesus was going to walk past them. Alternate translation: “he was about to pass by them” or “it looked like he was going to pass by them”
6:49-50 pi8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge οἱ, δὲ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα, ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν, καὶ ἀνέκραξαν & πάντες γὰρ αὐτὸν εἶδον, καὶ ἐταράχθησαν & ὁ δὲ εὐθὺς ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς, θαρσεῖτε, ἐγώ εἰμι; μὴ φοβεῖσθε 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [6:49](../06/49.md) and [6:50](../06/50.md) into a verse bridge, as the UST does, in order to give all the reasons why the disciples **cried out** before stating that they **cried out**. Alternate translation: “But they, having seen him walking on the sea, thought that he is a ghost. In fact, they all saw him and were troubled. So, they cried out. But immediately he spoke with them and says to them, ‘Take courage! It is I! Do not be afraid!’”
6:49 go9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the next thing that happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next event, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Then”
6:49 ddd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης περιπατοῦντα 1 See how you translated this phrase in [6:48](../06/48.md). Alternate translation: “walking on the surface of the sea” or “miraculously walking on top of the sea”
6:49 xa2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἔδοξαν ὅτι φάντασμά ἐστιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “thought, ‘He is a ghost,’”
6:49 e4o8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown φάντασμά 1 Here, the word **ghost** refers to a spiritual or supernatural being that people see. In Jesus’ culture, when people saw a **ghost**, they usually assumed that something bad was going to happen. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of unusual experience, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “an apparition” or “some powerful and dangerous being”
6:50 lr8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the disciples cried out (see [6:49](../06/49.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for an action, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “because” or “which they did because”
6:50 xph7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐταράχθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were very nervous” or “were very anxious”
6:50 st68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ἐλάλησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 The expression **spoke with them and says to them** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “says to them” or “spoke to them”
6:50 nue5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-tense λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
6:50 et5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θαρσεῖτε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous”
6:51 vfo6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo λείαν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο 1 The expression **they were very amazed within themselves** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in some languages. If this is true of your language, you could shorten the expression. Alternate translation: “they were very amazed”
6:51 s26w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λείαν & ἐξίσταντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they marveled very much”
6:52 etr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation about why the disciples reacted the way they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “They were so amazed because” or “They responded like that since”
6:52 m53m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & συνῆκαν ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄρτοις 1 Here Mark implies that they **did not understand** what Jesus’ miracle with **the loaves** indicated about him. In other words, when Jesus fed many people with just five **loaves**, it meant that he was a very powerful, special person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what it meant when Jesus fed many people with the five loaves” or “they did not realize the significance of the miracle Jesus had performed with the loaves”
6:52 e5uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοῖς ἄρτοις 1 See how you translated **loaves** in [6:38](../06/38.md). Alternate translation: “large chunks of bread”
6:52 ufmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast τοῖς ἄρτοις ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **but** introduces what was true about the disciples (they had hard hearts) in contrast with what they should have done (**understand about the loaves**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **but** untranslated. Alternate translation: “the loaves; instead,”
6:52 t1qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη 1 Here, Mark is speaking of the disciples’ **heart** as if it **were having been hardened**. He means that the disciples were stubborn and refused to listen and learn. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they were being stubborn” or “they were unwilling to pay attention”
6:52 lxd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that it was the disciples themselves. Alternate translation: “their hearts had become hard” or “they had hardened their hearts”
6:52 m7yv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία 1 If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “their hearts”
6:53 twem rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διαπεράσαντες 1 Mark implies that they **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having crossed over the lake”
6:53 bxnf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went”
6:53 p316 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γεννησαρὲτ 1 The word **Gennesaret** could refer to: (1) a region on the northwest side of the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the area called Gennesaret” (2) a small town on the northwest side of the Sea of Galilee. Alternate translation: “the village of Gennesaret”
6:53 p79w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown προσωρμίσθησαν 1 When people anchor a boat, they fasten it securely to something solid so that it cannot float away. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of action, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “pulled the boat up on the shore” or “tied the boat to something on the shore” or “secured the boat there”
6:54 xlpe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντων 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “gone” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone out”
6:55 d9k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns περιέδραμον & ἤρξαντο & ἤκουον 1 Here, the pronoun **they** in the phrase **they ran** refers to the people who recognized Jesus. The pronoun **they** in the phrases **they began** and **they were hearing** refer to people who lived throughout **that whole region**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the people there ran throughout … those who lived in that region began … they were hearing”
6:55 ufvx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τοῖς κραβάττοις 1 The word **mats** refers to portable beds that could also be used to transport a person. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of bed, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. See how you translated this word in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “their stretchers”
6:55 rcq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπὶ τοῖς κραβάττοις τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας 1 The pronoun **their** refers to **the ones having sickness**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more directly. Alternate translation: “the ones having sickness on their mats”
6:55 svpg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sickness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the sick people”
6:55 f5s2 ὅπου ἤκουον ὅτι ἐστίν 1 Alternate translation: “wherever they were hearing that Jesus had gone”
6:55 afpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἤκουον ὅτι ἐστίν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were hearing, ‘He is there’”
6:56 bqzf εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς 1 Alternate translation: “into little towns or into big towns or into rural areas”
6:56 gi6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐτίθεσαν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers generally to people. Alternate translation: “men and women were placing”
6:56 eh2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῖς ἀγοραῖς 1 The word **marketplaces** refers to large, open-air areas where people buy and sell goods. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of area, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the town squares” or “the parks”
6:56 y6hs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παρεκάλουν & ἅψωνται 1 The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they might touch** refers to **the ones being sick**. The pronoun **they** in the phrase **they were begging** could refer to: (1) **the ones being sick**. Alternate translation: “these sick people were begging … they might touch” (2) the people who were **placing the ones being sick in the marketplaces**. Alternate translation: “the people who placed the sick people there were begging … the sick people might touch”
6:56 k4tq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αὐτὸν ἵνα κἂν τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται; καὶ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “him, ‘Please let us even touch the edge of your garment.’ And”
6:56 gsdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κἂν & ἅψωνται 1 Here, the word **even** indicates that these people think that, to be healed, they do not need to do anything more than touch Jesus’ garment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make that idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all they might do is touch” or “they could only touch”
6:56 zo6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἂν ἥψαντο αὐτοῦ ἐσῴζοντο 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could indicate that was God or Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “God was healing as many as touched it” or “Jesus was healing as many as touched it”
6:56 cir0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 2 Here, the word translated **it** could: (1) refer to a thing, in this case **the edge** of Jesus’ garment. Alternate translation: “the edge of his garment” (2) refer to a person, in this case Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “him”
7:intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6–7, which are words quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Hand washing\n\nThe Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty, because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people please God by trusting and obeying him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “Ephphatha”\n\nThis is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
7:1 b9ul rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων 1 This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event.
7:2 wd6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo 0 # General Information:\n\nThe following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here.
7:3 mj6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background γὰρ 1 This verse and the next verse are added to explain why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because”
7:3 x0b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 The **tradition of the elders** consisted of teachings that were handed down from generation to generation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “observing strictly the teachings which past generations had taught them”
7:4 d3qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων 1 The **cups, and pots, and copper vessels** would have been used for consuming food and drinks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “cups, pots, and copper vessels for eating and drinking”
7:5 hts4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τί οὐ περιπατοῦσιν οἱ μαθηταί σου κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 The phrase **walk according to** is way of saying “obey.” If your readers would not understand what **walk** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Why do your disciples not obey what the elders have taught us”
7:5 ugom rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, **but** is used here to contrast what the Pharisees thought Jesus’ disciples should be doing with what they were actually doing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast.
7:6 oavh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς, ὅτι καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν Ἠσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται, ὅτι οὗτος ὁ λαὸς τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them, ‘Isaiah prophesied well about you hypocrites when God wrote through him that people honor him with their lips, but their desires are for other things’”
7:6 ep7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῖς χείλεσίν 1 Here, **lips** is used to signify speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by what they say”
7:6 zgt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ & καρδία αὐτῶν 1 The word **heart** means inner thoughts and desires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “their desire”
7:6 xtab rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The expression **their heart is far away from me** is a way that God is saying that the people are not truly devoted to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” or “but they are not truly devoted to me” or “but they are not really committed to honoring me”
7:8 hnw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε 1 Here, to **hold fast to** something means to adhere to something consistently. If your readers would not understand what **hold fast** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “you cling to”
7:9 e3qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony καλῶς ἀθετεῖτε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε 1 Jesus says **You do well at rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your tradition** to rebuke his listeners for forsaking God’s **commandment**. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You think you have done well by rejecting the commandment of God so that you may keep your own traditions, but what you have done is not good at all”
7:10 d4sd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς γὰρ εἶπεν, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου; καί, ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the person who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die”
7:11 cd57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate κορβᾶν 1 **Corban** is a Hebrew word that refers to things that people promise to give to God. Translators normally transliterate it, using the target language alphabet. Some translators translate its meaning and then leave out Mark’s explanation of the meaning that follows. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning.
7:11 ev2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background ὅ ἐστιν δῶρον 1 The author says **that is, a gift** to provide background information to his audience, who may not have understood this word. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “meaning ‘a gift’”
7:14 u3nk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀκούσατέ μου πάντες καὶ σύνετε 1 The words **Listen** and **understand** are related. Jesus uses them together to emphasize that his hearers should pay close attention to what he is saying. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “All of you, take heed to what I am about to say to you”
7:15 gk5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδέν & ἔξωθεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking about what a person eats. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nothing which a person can eat”
7:15 ms5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενά 1 By using the phrase **the things that come out from the man**, Jesus is speaking about the thoughts and desires of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the things which a person thinks and does”
7:17 l7d7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ ὅτε 1 Here, the phrase **And when** is being used as a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.
7:18 z8w1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand!”
7:18 yqve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶν τὸ ἔξωθεν εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, οὐ δύναται αὐτὸν κοινῶσαι 1 See the note in [7:15](../07/15.md) regarding the similar expression.
7:19 y2cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ εἰσπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** means a person’s inner being or mind. Here, Jesus means that food does not affect a person’s character. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “it cannot go into his inner being” or “it cannot go into his mind”
7:19 hm98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καθαρίζων πάντα τὰ βρώματα 1 The phrase **making all foods clean** explains to the reader the significance of Jesus’ saying. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
7:20 r12p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, ἐκεῖνο κοινοῖ 1 **What is coming out from the man** means the thoughts and intentions of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “It is what a person thinks and desires that defiles”
7:21 chkk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐκπορεύονται 1 Here, **heart** refers to a person’s inner being or mind. Alternate translation: “out of the inner being of a person come evil thoughts” or “out of the mind of a person come evil thoughts”
7:21 eey1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litany πορνεῖαι, κλοπαί, φόνοι 1 Mark lists out a number of sins here and in the next verse. Use a natural form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done wrong.
7:24 k9bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ εἰσελθὼν εἰς οἰκίαν, οὐδένα ἤθελεν γνῶναι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνάσθη λαθεῖν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe phrase **and having entered into a house, he was wanting no one to know {it}, but he was not able to hide** provides background information to what Jesus was thinking as he traveled to this area. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Having entered someone’s house, he was hoping he would not be found, but he was unable to hide from the people of that place”
7:26 aik7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἡ δὲ γυνὴ ἦν Ἑλληνίς, Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει 1 This sentence gives us background information about **the woman**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
7:26 e39y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Συροφοινίκισσα 1 The phrase **a Syrophoenician** explains the woman’s nationality. She was born in the Phoenician region in Syria.
7:27 gsj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν καλόν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων, καὶ τοῖς κυναρίοις βαλεῖν 1 Here, Jesus speaks about the Jews as if they are **children** and the Gentiles as if they are **little dogs**. This is not meant as a derogatory remark, but he is talking in terms of whether they are Israelites or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Let the children of Israel first eat, for it is not right to take the children’s bread and throw it to the Gentiles, who are like household pets compared to them”
7:27 r898 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄφες πρῶτον χορτασθῆναι τὰ τέκνα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We must first feed the children of Israel”
7:27 k2wb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 Here, **bread** refers to food in general.
7:29 sa9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὕπαγε 1 Jesus was implying that the woman no longer needed to stay to ask him to help her daughter. He would do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this. Alternate translation: “you may go now” or “you may go home in peace”
7:29 sbqp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου 1 **The demon** left the **daughter** because Jesus commanded it to do so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have commanded the demon to leave your daughter”
7:31 cxa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 This word, **Decapolis**, is the name of a region that means Ten Cities. It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:20](../05/20.md).
7:32 jlj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν ἵνα ἐπιθῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα 1 Prophets and teachers would put place their **hand on** a person in order to heal them or bless them. In this case, people plead with Jesus to heal a man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they begged Jesus to put his hand on the man to heal him”
7:33 ld3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πτύσας 1 Here, Jesus **spit** on his fingers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after spitting on his fingers”
7:34 lbw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate ἐφφαθά 1 **Ephphatha** is an Aramaic word. Mark spelled it using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told what it meant, “**Be opened**”. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning.
7:35 yg15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἠνοίγησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί 1 The phrase **his ears were opened** means that the man was enabled to hear. Alternate translation: “Jesus opened his ears, and he was able to hear” or “he was able to hear”
7:35 yj4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **his tongue was released** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus took away what prevented his tongue from speaking” or “Jesus loosened his tongue”
7:35 gssm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **the band of his tongue was released** means he became able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was freed and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak”
7:36 eb2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅσον & αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ 1 This refers to Jesus ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone”
7:37 dh17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς κωφοὺς & ἀλάλους 1 The phrase **the deaf** and the phrase **the mute** both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak”
8:intro ry56 0 # Mark 8 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Bread\n\nWhen Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.\n\nYeast is the ingredient that causes bread to expand before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Adulterous generation”\n\nWhen Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The historic present\n\nTo call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nJesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples [Mark 8:17–21](./17.md) and rebuking the people [Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” [Mark 8:35–37](../08/35.md)
8:1 rmd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 The phrase **In those days** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events in the story that Mark has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event.
8:1 sgv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nFollowing this, Jesus explains why the crowd did not have **anything to eat**. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here.
8:3 u3mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to bring to the disciples attention the dangers of making the people return home without eating. Alternate translation: “If I should send them to their houses hungry, some of them might collapse on the way home”
8:4 jdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας? 1 The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food for the crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!”
8:6 x2jr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations παραγγέλλει τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to recline on the ground** as a direct quotation, as modeled by the UST.
8:7 bio6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἶπεν καὶ ταῦτα παρατιθέναι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **to serve these also** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to the disciples, ‘Serve these fish also’”
8:8 v5zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσεύματα κλασμάτων ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας 1 This refers to the **broken pieces** of bread that were left over after the people ate. Alternate translation: “the remaining broken pieces of bread, which filled seven large baskets”
8:9 m81z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἦσαν δὲ ὡς τετρακισχίλιοι 1 Mark includes the phrase **Now there were about 4,000** to help his reader to know how many people are there. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “There were approximately 4,000 people that Jesus fed”
8:10 qnt3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory καὶ εὐθὺς ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ 1 **And immediately, having gotten into the boat with his disciples** is a comment concluding the story of Jesus feeding the 4,000 people. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.
8:10 y8u3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουθά 1 They went to **Dalmanutha** in a boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he traveled over the Sea of Galilee to the regions of Dalmanutha”
8:10 x33a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δαλμανουθά 1 The word **Dalmanutha** is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee.
8:11 zi91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 Here, **heaven** refers to where God dwells and is an indirect way of referring to “God” himself. If your readers would not understand the use of the word **heaven** in this context, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a sign from God”
8:12 sn5a ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **sighed greatly in his spirit** means that Jesus groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated the word “sighed” in [Mark 7:34](../07/34.md).
8:12 s8xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **in his spirit** means “within himself” or “to himself.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to himself”
8:12 g4lz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον? 1 Jesus asks **Why does this generation seek for a sign** to show that they have not understood the miracles that he has done up until this point. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This generation should not seek a sign!”
8:12 l335 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τί ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη ζητεῖ σημεῖον 1 When Jesus speaks of **this generation**, he is referring to some of the people who lived at that time and who were not following God. He was not speaking of every single person alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Why do you Pharisees ask for a sign”
8:12 a2x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ δοθήσεται & σημεῖον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give you a sign”
8:12 q4wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰ δοθήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον 1 The phrase **if a sign will be given to this generation … ** is an idiom which means that a sign certainly will not be given. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not give you a sign”
8:13 i2se rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς, πάλιν ἐμβὰς 1 Jesus’ was not the only one who left; his disciples were with him also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left them and got into the boat again”
8:13 u1qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πέραν 1 The phrase **to the other side** is referring to **the other side** of the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the other side of the Sea of Galilee”
8:14 gtg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions καὶ ἐπελάθοντο λαβεῖν ἄρτους, καὶ εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ 1 If it would appear in your language that Mark was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ disciples only brought one loaf of bread onto the boat with them”
8:15 bd2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε 1 The warning terms **See** and **watch out** both have very similar meanings and are repeated here for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Make sure you keep watch” or “Be sure to guard yourselves against”
8:15 nszl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ τῆς ζύμης Ἡρῴδου 1 Jesus is comparing the Pharisees’ and Herod’s teachings to **yeast**. When yeast is put into bread, it affects the entire batch of bread which is made. You should not explain this when you translate it, for the disciples themselves did not understand it.
8:16 zfw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχουσιν 1 The word **no** is an exaggeration. The disciples did have one loaf of bread ([Mark 8:14](../08/14.md)), but that was not enough for all of them. Alternate translation: “they have very little bread”
8:17 hnh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε? 1 Here, Jesus is not seeking information from the disciples. but rather. he is rebuking his disciples because they should have understood what he had been talking about. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not think that I am speaking of actual bread!”
8:17 dmt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε 1 The phrase **Do you not yet perceive** and the phrase **nor understand** have the same meaning. Jesus uses these phrases together here to emphasize the fact that they do not understand. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Do you not yet understand?”
8:17 wf6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε? 1 Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “By now, you should perceive and understand the things I say and do.”
8:17 fn31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 Here, the word **hearts** refers to a person’s mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Have you become resistant to understanding”
8:17 rq8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 The phrase **hearts become hardened** is a metaphor for not being able or willing to understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture.
8:17 mihv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πεπωρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν? 1 Here, Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your thinking has become so dull!” or “You are so slow to understand what I mean!”
8:18 u1gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε? καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε? 1 Jesus continues to rebuke his disciples by asking them more questions. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You have eyes, but you do not understand what you see. You have ears, but you do not understand what you hear. You should remember the things that I have said and done.”
8:18 qt58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες, οὐ βλέπετε? καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἀκούετε 1 The phrases **do you not see** and **do you not hear** are both idioms meaning that the disciples did not understand. They heard and saw everything Jesus did, but they did not understand what it meant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do you not understand the things which I have said and done the whole time you have been with me?”
8:19 t7ig rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers τοὺς πεντακισχιλίους 1 Alternate translation: “the five thousand people”
8:20 lip5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους 1 Alternate translation: “the four thousand people”
8:21 kh42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὔπω συνίετε? 1 Jesus is not seeking information from his disciples, but rather, he is using the question form to rebuke his disciples for not understanding what he has done in front of their eyes. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should understand by now the things I have said and done!”
8:22 c92c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Bethsaida”
8:22 mj78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχονται εἰς Βηθσαϊδάν 1 Jesus and his disciples traveled to Bethsaida in a boat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they came to Bethsaida in a boat”
8:22 mul4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βηθσαϊδάν 1 The word **Bethsaida** is the name of a town on the northern shore of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated the name of this town in [Mark 6:45](../06/45.md).
8:22 mx9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται 1 They wanted Jesus to **touch** the man in order to heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to touch him in order to heal him”
8:24 r6tk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας 1 The man sees people **walking** around, yet they are not clear to him. To the man, people just look like tall figures, so he compares them to **trees**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees”
8:25 td9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη 1 The phrase **was restored** can be written is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus restored the man’s sight, and then the man opened his eyes”
8:27 e4l3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς κώμας 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples came out into the villages”
8:28 nn1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἄλλοι Ἠλείαν, ἄλλοι δὲ ὅτι εἷς τῶν προφητῶν 1 The two occurrences of **others** in this verse both refer to “other people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are Elijah, but other people say you are one of the prophets”
8:30 rgy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **they might tell no one about him** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus strongly warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’”
8:31 m32p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up from the dead”
8:31 gjg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι 1 The events of this verse progress in chronological order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “first, and for the elders and the chief priests and the scribes to reject me. Then, people will kill me. But after that, on the third day, I will rise from the dead”
8:31 h9t2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person δεῖ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ παθεῖν 1 By referring to himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If this would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. Alternate translation: “it was necessary that he, the Son of Man, should suffer many things”
8:33 nu32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, Σατανᾶ 1 By saying **Get behind me, Satan**, Jesus could mean: (1) that Satan is directly influencing Peter to think and act the way he is. (2) that Peter is acting like **Satan** because Peter is trying to prevent Jesus from accomplishing what God sent him to do, which is the very thing that Satan also tried to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Get behind me, because you are acting like Satan!”
8:33 r9gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 In this verse Jesus is saying that Peter is acting in a way that he should not act. Here, the word **but** introduces a contrast between setting one’s mind (thoughts) on the things of God and setting one’s mind (thoughts) on the things of men. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “instead of”
8:33 clxo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 To **set your mind** on something means to think about it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you are not focusing your thoughts on what God desires”
8:33 t6jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Jesus leaves some words out in the phrase **on the things of men** that would be needed in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you are not thinking about what God desires, but you are thinking about what man desires”
8:33 tn0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women and refers to humans in general. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of people” or “that humans think about” or “that people think about”
8:34 m732 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀπίσω μου ἀκολουθεῖν 1 Here, ** to follow after** Jesus represents being one of his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” or “be one of my disciples”
8:34 c6ll rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 The **cross** here represents suffering and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “be willing to suffer and die for my sake and follow me”
8:35 d5rj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὃς γὰρ ἐὰν θέλῃ 1 By using the word **whoever**, Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “For if a person desires”
8:35 nn0a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἀπολέσει αὐτήν 1 Here, **lose it** is a polite way to say that God will judge the person who tries to save their own soul. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will forfeit his life”
8:36 ua46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖ ἄνθρωπον, κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον καὶ ζημιωθῆναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ? 1 Jesus is not seeking information here, but rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even if a person gains the whole world, it will not benefit him if he forfeits his life!”
8:36 mxuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Mark is using the phrase **a man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person”
8:36 jde6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κερδήσῃ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον 1 The phrase **the whole world** is an exaggeration meaning that the person might gain great riches and fame. Alternate translation: “to gain everything he desires”
8:37 wua4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί γὰρ δοῖ ἄνθρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς ψυχῆς αὐτοῦ? 1 Jesus asks this question to emphasize the value of the soul of each person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is nothing a person can give in exchange for his life!” or “No one can give anything in exchange for his life!”
8:38 c53y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ, τῇ μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ 1 Jesus speaks of this **generation** as **adulterous**, meaning that they are unfaithful in their relationship with God. If your readers would not understand what **adulterous** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this generation of people who have committed adultery and sinned against God” or “in this generation of people who are unfaithful to God and are very sinful”
8:38 ov1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ 1 See how you translated “this generation” in [8:12](../08/12.md)
8:38 s5tm rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md).
8:38 hvx0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man”
9:intro n92j 0 # Mark 9 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “Transfigured”\n\nScripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Hyperbole\n\nJesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so that his hearers would pay close attention to what he was saying and realize how important it is to avoid sin.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Elijah and Moses\n\nElijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md)).
9:1 q4b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state who **he** refers to in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying to them”
9:1 xm40 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Here, the pronoun **you** is plural, in the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, and **you** refers to everyone to whom Jesus is speaking. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “Truly, I say to all of you”
9:1 kg4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 The phrase **taste death** is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die”
9:1 qloy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die”
9:1 ymou rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God having come powerfully”
9:1 yjf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 The phrase **the kingdom of God having come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God having come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2–10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king”
9:2 uf5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους 1 Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were **alone** and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain.
9:2 krt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been”
9:2 b3bb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase **he was transfigured before them** with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them”
9:3 gp48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς οὐ δύναται οὕτως λευκᾶναι 1 The word **launderer** refers to a person who worked with cloth to clean and bleach cloth and clothing. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of the word **launderer**, you could state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “whiter than any person who bleached cloth could make them” or “such as no person on earth who bleached cloth could make them”
9:4 f2d6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἠλείας 1 The word **Elijah** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Mark 6:15](../mrk/06/15.md).
9:4 r3uu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John.
9:4 pj3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν συνλαλοῦντες 1 Here, the word **they** refers to Elijah and Moses. Alternate translation: “Elijah and Moses were talking with”
9:4 sh7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὤφθη αὐτοῖς Ἠλείας σὺν Μωϋσεῖ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the passive phrase **were seen** with an active form. Alternate translation: “And they saw Elijah and Moses”
9:4 y9r3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The word **them** refers to Peter, James, and John.
9:5 w6vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Πέτρος λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the word **answering** is used to introduce Peter into the conversation. Peter was not answering a question.
9:5 iqc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι 1 Here, the pronoun **us** could: (1) refer only to Peter, James, and John, in which case **us** would be exclusive. (2) include Jesus, in which case **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
9:6 r3bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background οὐ γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἀποκριθῇ; ἔκφοβοι γὰρ ἐγένοντο 1 This entire verse is a parenthetical statement which gives background information about Peter, James, and John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
9:7 x4mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης 1 Mark speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from the cloud to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the cloud and said”
9:7 ybu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 The word **Son** is an important title for Jesus. Here, the word **Son** describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father.
9:7 lg0e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀκούετε 1 **Listen** is a command or instruction God gave to Peter, James, and John. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people.
9:8 hq73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐκέτι & εἶδον 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John.
9:9 q2qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 The first occurrence of the word **they** in this verse refers to Jesus and Peter and James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, Peter, James and John”
9:9 pdmm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered them”
9:9 w1nf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ ἃ εἶδον διηγήσωνται 1 Here, the pronoun **them** and the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **they** all refer to Peter, James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus ordered Peter and James and John not to tell anyone about what they had just seen”
9:9 zttm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can clarify that Jesus is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “he, the Son of Man”
9:9 w98g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ 1 Jesus speaks in this way of coming back to life, since it involves rising out of the grave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “would come back to life”
9:10 edv3 καὶ τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς 1 Here, Mark is using the term **word** in a specific sense, to mean “matter” or “event.” Alternate translation: “And they kept the matter to themselves”
9:10 to7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Mark is describing something Jesus would say by association with the words that came from his mouth when he taught them this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what he said”
9:11 s9zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter, James, and John were questioning Jesus, saying”
9:11 je29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν 1 Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they were questioning Jesus”
9:12 o8hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔφη 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was saying”
9:12 s3q3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ? 1 Jesus uses a rhetorical question here to remind his disciples that the Scriptures also teach that the **Son of Man** must suffer and be despised. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I also want you to consider what is written about the Son of Man. The Scriptures say that he must suffer many things and be despised.”
9:12 xazj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 Here, it is implied that those who would despise the **Son of Man** would be people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “would be despised by people”
9:12 toik rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ πῶς γέγραπται ἐπὶ τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, ἵνα πολλὰ πάθῃ καὶ ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning behind the phrase **been written** with an active form, as modeled by the UST.
9:12 i3j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξουδενηθῇ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could state the phrase **would be despised** in active form. Alternate translation: “that people would hate him”
9:13 k3kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐποίησαν αὐτῷ ὅσα ἤθελον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating explicitly what the Jewish people did to Elijah. Alternate translation: “our leaders treated him very badly, just as they wanted to”
9:14 n8fd ἐλθόντες πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 Alternate translation: “when Jesus, Peter, James, and John returned to the other disciples who had not gone with them up the mountain”
9:14 qsp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & αὐτούς 1 Here, both occurrences of the pronoun **them** refer to the other disciples of Jesus who had not went up on the mountain with Jesus, Peter, James, and John.
9:15 qhc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν & προστρέχοντες & αὐτόν 1 All three occurrences of the pronoun **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language.
9:16 w679 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτούς 1 Here, the first occurrence of the pronoun **them** could refer to: (1) the disciples of Jesus who had not gone up on the mountain. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked his disciples” (2) the people in the crowd. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the people in the crowd” (3) the scribes. Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the scribes”
9:18 zre6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἴσχυσαν 1 The phrase **they were not strong enough** refers to the disciples not being able to drive the spirit out of the boy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could not drive it out of him”
9:19 tb67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει 1 Here, the pronoun **them** is plural, so Jesus is addressing more than one person. However, it is not clear exactly to whom **them** refers. It could refer to the disciples, the crowd, the boy and his father, some combination of them, or to all of them at once. Here,**them** probably refers to everyone who was present. Use the form in your language that would be used for addressing a group of people. Alternate translation: “But answering all of them, Jesus said” or “Addressing them all, Jesus said” or “Addressing everyone present, Jesus said”
9:19 azc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **generation**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **generation** in another way, as modeled by the UST.
9:19 nbw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 1 Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean all the people who were alive at that time in history, and specifically, to refer to all the people who were present with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
9:19 c88a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος! ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 Here, Jesus uses two rhetorical questions, **until when will I be with you** and **Until when will I bear with you**, to show his frustration and disappointment with their unbelief. If you do not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or as an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “O unbelieving generation. You test my patience” or “O unbelieving generation. Your unbelief tires me! I wonder how long I must bear with you!” or “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you much longer!”
9:19 n4dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἕως πότε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι? ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 The question **until when will I be with you** and the question **Until when will I bear with you** have very similar meanings. Jesus uses these two similar questions together in order to emphasize his frustration and disappointment. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “how long must I be with you and endure your unbelief”
9:19 b7u5 ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “Until when should I endure you” or “Until when must I put up with you” or “How long must I endure you”
9:19 nrya rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular φέρετε αὐτὸν πρός με 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word **Bring** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people.
9:20 l4r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 In this verse the first and fourth occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the man’s “son”, who was possessed by a mute **spirit** and was mentioned in [Mark 9:17](../mrk/09/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen him, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions”
9:20 vdj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς αὐτόν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὸν, τὸ πνεῦμα εὐθὺς συνεσπάραξεν αὐτόν 1 In this verse, the second and third occurrence of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, consider clarifying this in your translation in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “And they brought the man’s son to Jesus, and having seen Jesus, the spirit immediately shook the boy with convulsions”
9:21 f5zm καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ, πόσος χρόνος ἐστὶν ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ? ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ἐκ παιδιόθεν 1 Alternate translation: “And Jesus asked the boy’s father, ‘How long of a time has this been happening to him?’ And the father said, ‘This has been happening to him since childhood’”
9:22 f5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure βοήθησον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισθεὶς ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 In the sentence **help us, having compassion on us**, Mark records the father using a figure of speech in which the logical flow of events is altered in order to put what is most important in the mind of the speaker first (here the speaker is the father). The normal way of saying this would be, “having compassion on us, help us”, because it shows the natural order of events, since **having compassion** on someone normally precedes helping them. Mark records the father saying **help us** first because receiving help was what was most important to the father. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “have compassion on us and help us”
9:22 fbup rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **compassion**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **compassion** in another way, such as by using the verb “pity,” as modeled by the UST.
9:23 vh6c εἰ δύνῃ 1 The phrase **If you are able** is Jesus repeating back to the man what the man had just said to Jesus. Jesus does this in order to rebuke the man’s doubt. If it would be more helpful in your language, you could express this as a statement or in some other way that is natural. Alternate translation: “You should not say to me, ‘If you are able’” or “You ask me if I am able. Of course I am able” or “Why do you say, ‘If you are able’”
9:23 kp1x πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 Alternate translation: “Everything is possible for the person who believes” or “Anything is possible for the person believing in God”
9:23 e5kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ πιστεύοντι 1 The word **believing** refers to belief in God, and here it specifically refers to belief in Jesus and his power. The phrase **the one** means “any person” or “any one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “for anyone who believes that God is able to do them” or “for any person who believes in God’s power” or “for anyone one who believes in me”
9:24 h4y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 The sentence **Help my unbelief** does not mean that the man had no belief in Jesus or his power, but rather, these words express that the man realized he did not believe fully or believe to the extent that he should. The man is asking Jesus to help him overcome his unbelief and increase his faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Help me to have more faith”
9:24 wssi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns βοήθει μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **unbelief**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **unbelief** in another way, as modeled by the UST.
9:25 qaw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος 1 The phrase **the crowd is running to {them}** means that more people were **running** toward where Jesus was and that the crowd there was growing larger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “many people were gathering around them” or “people were gathering quickly around them”
9:25 b54j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἐπισυντρέχει ὄχλος 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in this way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people was running to them” or “many people were running to them”
9:25 ul8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ κωφὸν πνεῦμα 1 The words **mute** and **deaf** can be explained if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “You unclean spirit who are causing this boy to be unable to speak and unable to hear”
9:25 zd5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔξελθε ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “go out from him”
9:26 i8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 Your language may say “went out” rather than **came out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “it went out” or “the spirit went out of the boy”
9:26 n7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ νεκρὸς 1 Mark is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the boy appeared dead” or “the boy looked like a dead person”
9:28 f0x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go εἰσελθόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς οἶκον 1 Your language may say “come” rather than **gone** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when he had come into a house”
9:29 pdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives τοῦτο τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδενὶ δύναται ἐξελθεῖν, εἰ μὴ ἐν προσευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ 1 The words **nothing** and **except** are both negative words. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “This kind can be cast out only by prayer and fasting”
9:29 v2s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο τὸ γένος 1 Here, the phrase **This kind** refers to a kind of unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This kind of unclean spirit”
9:29 kh4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go τοῦτο τὸ γένος & δύναται ἐξελθεῖν 1 Your language may say “go out” rather than **come out** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “This kind is able to go out”
9:29 yrzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προσευχῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **prayer** by using a verb form, as modeled by the UST.
9:29 l6ok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns νηστείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fasting**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **fasting** in another way, as modeled by the UST.
9:31 vpj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν, καὶ ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται 1 By calling himself **The Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST.
9:31 w75k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **is being handed over** with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Evil men will hand over the Son of Man”
9:31 z8ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, **hands** means control. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “into the control of men” or “into the custody of men”
9:31 s1n2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκτανθεὶς, μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστήσεται 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could translate the phrase **having been killed** with an active form and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “once they kill him, he will rise again after three days”
9:33 xv94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to Capernaum”
9:33 l2kj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ γενόμενος 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone into the house”
9:34 gdg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τίς μείζων 1 Here, **greatest** refers to who was the **greatest** among the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who was the greatest among them”
9:35 z754 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md).
9:35 fkf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must act as if he is the least important, and he must serve everyone”
9:35 jzl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Being **first** refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If it would help your readers to understand what it means to be **first** and **last** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express the meaning using plain language, as modeled by the UST.
9:35 ioiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important in God’s sight”
9:35 um58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language.
9:35 jqo3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people”
9:35 z9x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται & ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last”
9:36 qqcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples”
9:37 ul12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person. Alternate translation: “on my behalf”
9:37 uik3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 The phrase **does not receive me but the one having sent me** means that the people who receive Jesus are not just receiving him but are also receiving God, who sent him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “receives not just me, but also receives God who has sent me” or “receives not only me, but receives God who sent me to represent him”
9:37 y24n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who has sent me”
9:38 dxq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. The expression **in your name** means that the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” or “by your authority”
9:38 k2i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἠκολούθει ἡμῖν 1 Here, **following** does not seem to mean “to be one of Jesus’ disciples”, since this man was acting in Jesus’ **name**. Here, **following with us** means that this man did not travel in the group of Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language to express this. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” or “he is not part of our group”
9:39 oynl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **prevent**. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue”
9:39 yw2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀνόματί 1 See how you translated **name** in [9:38](../09/38.md).
9:39 h7ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κακολογῆσαί 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evil**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **evil** by using an adjective to describe it or by expressing it some other way that is natural in language.
9:41 lz5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ὕδατος ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε 1 Jesus speaks about giving someone **a cup of water** as an example of how one person may help another, and the example could refer to any possible way that a person might help someone else. Here, giving one of the disciples a cup of water in Jesus’ name refers to helping them because they represent Jesus and are doing his work. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar expression from your language or say this using plain language. Alternate translation: “gives you a cup of water because you are working for me” or “helps you on my account”
9:41 m0d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀνόματι 1 See how you translated **name** in [9:37](../09/37.md).
9:41 u325 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν ὀνόματι 1 Here, the phrase **in the name** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “in my name” or “in the name of me, Jesus,”
9:41 bpz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ὀνόματι, ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε 1 Here, **in the name because** is an idiom which means to do something for the sake of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “because you belong to Christ” or “because you serve me”
9:41 bgq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ 1 Here, Jesus uses the negative phrase **certainly not** together with the negative word **lose**to express a strong positive meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he will certainly receive”
9:41 wnb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reward**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **reward** by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “he will certainly be rewarded” or “God will certainly reward that person”
9:41 jjq5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Although the pronouns **he** and **his** are masculine, they are being used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “that person will certainly not lose their reward”
9:42 cj0l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 The phrase **these little ones** could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically little compared to adults. Alternate translation: “one of these children who believe in me” (2) a reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “one of these new believers” or (3) a reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “one of these common people”
9:42 gef5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Here, Jesus is making a comparison to the punishment that people will receive from God for causing other people to sin. Jesus means that the person’s punishment from God for causing people to sin will be worse than if that person had drowned in the sea. He is not saying that someone would actually put a stone around a person’s neck and throw them into the sea as an alternative to being punished by God. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “The punishment he will receive will be worse than if”
9:42 z6k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μύλος ὀνικὸς 1 A **millstone of a donkey** was a round stone used for grinding grain into flour. It was so heavy that it required a donkey or an ox to turn it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone,” as modeled by the UST.
9:42 bx6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone of a donkey around his neck”
9:43 g8dv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου 1 Here, **hand** is a metonym for doing, or desiring to do, something sinful with your hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful with one of your hands” or “if you are doing something sinful with one of your hands”
9:43 ifcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν 1 When Jesus says, **if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off**, he is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off **your hand**, because Judaism taught against harming one’s body, and Jesus taught in [Mark 7:14–23](../mrk/07/14.md), and elsewhere that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes.
9:43 wd7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 Here, the phrase **enter into life** is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and live forever”
9:43 h9lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole κυλλὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal **life crippled**, he is not being literal, but rather, he is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes.
9:43 l5bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **life** in another way. Alternate translation: “to live with God forever” or “live forever with God”
9:45 lx2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ πούς σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε 1 Here, the word **foot** refers to going, or desiring to go someplace for the purpose of sinning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you use your foot to walk someplace in order to sin”
9:45 so26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 See how you translated the phrase **enter into life** in [Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md).
9:45 vj49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν χωλὸν 1 When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal **life lame**, he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical injuries or impairments. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes in your translation.
9:45 hbt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **to be thrown** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into Gehenna”
9:47 okc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν 1 Being the organ of vision, the **eye** substitutes for looking at something. In this case, the person looks at something which God has prohibited, which in turn can cause the person to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to sin because of looking at something, tear your eye out” or “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out”
9:47 h4dv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **enter into the kingdom of God** is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. This phrase has a similar meaning to the phrase “to enter into life” which was used in [Mark 9:43](../mrk/09/43.md) and [Mark 9:45](../mrk/09/45.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s kingdom and live with him forever with only one eye”
9:47 t7uv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 When Jesus speaks of entering **into the kingdom of God with one eye** he is not being literal, but rather is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes.
9:47 r2gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 See how you translated the phrase **to be thrown into Gehenna** in [Mark 9:45](../mrk/09/45.md).
9:49 mr5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πᾶς & πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the phrase **will be salted** in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will salt everyone with fire”
9:49 ma3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πυρὶ ἁλισθήσεται 1 Here, **fire** is a metaphor for suffering, and putting salt on people is a metaphor for purifying them, so **will be salted with fire** is a metaphor for being purified through suffering. Alternate translation: “will be made pure in the fire of suffering” or “will suffer in order to be purified, as a sacrifice is purified with salt”
9:50 fqb8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε? 1 By using the question **with what will you season it?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form to emphasize a truth that he wants his listeners to understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot make it salty again.”
9:50 f34y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were **salt**. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what **salt** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food”
9:50 syc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 The plural reflexive pronoun **yourselves** is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves. Use a form that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “Make sure that each of you has salt within yourself”
9:50 tind rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις 1 The command, **be at peace with one another**, is an instruction to all of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people.
10:intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in [Mark10:7–8](../mrk/10/07.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Jesus’ teaching about divorce\n\nThe Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. As Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage, he shows that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nMetaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../mrk/10/43.md)).
10:1 qq93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται 1 Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him, and they were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place”
10:1 goki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 Your language may say “comes” rather than **goes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he comes”
10:1 j5wa καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Alternate translation: “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River”
10:1 s6fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go συνπορεύονται & ὄχλοι πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “the crowds went together to him”
10:5 m73x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** refers to a person’s inner being or mind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as modeled by the UST.
10:5 xqzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν 1 The phrase **hardness of heart** is an idiom which describes stubbornly choosing to resist God’s will and desires and instead choosing one’s own will and desires. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. See how you translated the phrase “the hardness of their heart” in [Mark 3:5](../mrk/03/05.md). Alternate translation: “your stubbornness”
10:6 m6lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς 1 Here, the adjectives **male** and **female** are being used as nouns in order to describe two groups of people, men and women. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these in another way. Alternate translation: “God made people to be men and women”
10:6 jz57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτούς 1 Beginning in the previous verse, Jesus begins directly addressing the Pharisees with the words “Because of your hardness of heart.” Here and in the next two verses, he continues to address the Pharisees. In this verse, Jesus begins quoting two Old Testament scripture passages, [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md) and [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md) which he concludes at the end of [Mark 10:8](../mrk/10/08.md). Jesus’ entire address is enclosed with double quotation marks. His quotation of the Old Testament is enclosed with single quotation marks, because it is a quote within a quote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But from the beginning of creation, the Scriptures tell us that God made people male and female”
10:7 lfzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns καταλείψει ἄνθρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 Here, the word **man** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “men will leave their fathers and mothers” or “men will leave their parents”
10:8 rd63 καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν; ὥστε οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ 1 In this verse Jesus finishes his quotation of [Genesis 1:27](../gen/01/27.md) and [Genesis 2:24](../gen/02/24.md). Jesus began quoting Genesis in the second half of [Mark 10:6](../mrk/10/06.md).
10:8 p7yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκέτι εἰσὶν δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ 1 A husband and wife **no longer** being **two** but instead being **one flesh** is metaphor illustrating the husband and wife’s close union as a couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or clarify this using plain language. Alternate translation: “the two people are like one person”
10:9 ty4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ οὖν ὁ Θεὸς συνέζευξεν, ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω 1 The phrase **what God joined together** refers to any married couple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Therefore, since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one separate them” or “Therefore, since God has joined together husband and wife, let no one tear them apart”
10:9 pty4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω 1 Here, although the term **man** is masculine, it is used in a generic sense to refer to any person, male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “should not be separated by any person” or “let people not separate”
10:10 l8fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ τούτου ἐπηρώτων αὐτόν 1 The word **this** refers to the conversation that Jesus just had with the Pharisees about divorce. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “asked Jesus about the conversation he had just had with the Pharisees”
10:11 i5kp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὃς ἂν 1 Here the word **Whoever** does not refer to anyone in the world, but rather to any person who **divorces his wife and marries another** person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Anyone who”
10:12 sn1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μοιχᾶται 1 Here, the phrase **she commits adultery** means that a woman who divorces her husband and marries another man commits adultery against her previous husband. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she commits adultery against the first man she married”
10:13 zx1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And it happened that” or “After this”
10:13 nmw7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσέφερον 1 Here, **they** refers to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
10:13 pk8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτῶν ἅψηται 1 Here, **he might touch them** means that Jesus would lay his hands on the children and bless them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might touch them with his hands and bless them” or “Jesus might lay his hands on them and bless them”
10:14 yi5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄφετε τὰ παιδία ἔρχεσθαι πρός με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά 1 The phrase **Permit the little children to come to me** and the phrase **do not forbid them** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Be sure to allow the little children to come to me”
10:14 qj7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ κωλύετε 1 If the double negative **do not forbid** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “allow”
10:15 y3a2 ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 Alternate translation: “if anyone will not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, that person will definitely not enter it”
10:15 a1e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς παιδίον 1 The point of the comparison, **as a little child**, is that Jesus is comparing how a person must receive the kingdom of God with how a little child would receive things. If it would help in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with humble faith”
10:15 q3ck rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 Here, the word **it** refers to the kingdom of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not enter the kingdom of God”
10:17 fpp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω 1 Here, the word **inherit** means “be given” or “receive” and is being used to mean “receive eternal life” or “be given eternal life.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to receive eternal life” or “in order to obtain eternal life”
10:17 h45i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind **life** by using a verbal form like “live,” as modeled by the UST.
10:18 lw1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? 1 Jesus’ statement “Why are you calling me good?” is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using in order to make a point and not to obtain information. If you would not use a rhetorical question to make a point in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You do not understand what you are saying when you call me good!”
10:18 gyod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 By saying, **Why are you calling me good? No one is good except one—God**, Jesus is correcting the man’s misunderstanding regarding eternal life and about what it takes to please God. In the previous verse, the man called Jesus “Good Teacher,” thinking that Jesus was a good man but not knowing that Jesus was God. In this verse, Jesus redirects the man’s focus away from people and towards God. As evidenced by the man’s question to Jesus in the previous verse, the man thinks that in order to merit God’s approval and “inherit eternal life,” a person simply needs to know the right things and do them. Jesus’ words in this verse are meant to correct the man’s thinking and show the man that only God is fully good and that to please God, a person must focus on God and put their trust in God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly.
10:19 qs3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας: μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, μὴ ἀποστερήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 In the previous verse Jesus begins directly addressing the man who came to him. This verse continues Jesus’ direct speech to the man. However, in this verse, beginning with the phrase **Do not kill**, Jesus begins quoting several Old Testament passages. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ direct quotation of the Old Testament as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “You know that the Scriptures tell us that we should not kill, commit adultery, steal, testify falsely, or defraud others, and that each person must honor their father and mother”
10:21 syq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕν σε ὑστερεῖ 1 Here, **lack** is a metaphor for still needing to do something. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what it means to **lack** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “One thing you need to do” or “There is one thing you have not yet done”
10:21 rd85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Here Jesus implies that the man should **give** the money the man would receive from selling his possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
10:21 ux1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the phrase **the poor** with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor”
10:21 iij4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕξεις θησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 Jesus speaks of rewards in heaven as if these rewards are **treasure**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation, “you will be rewarded in heaven”
10:22 afu7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῷ λόγῳ 1 Although the term **word** is singular, Mark is using this term to refer to all of the instructions that Jesus gave the man in the prior verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language, as modeled by the UST.
10:24 fh1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνα 1 Here Jesus is using the term **Children** to describe the disciples. They are under his spiritual care and Jesus teaches them as a father would instruct his children, and he regards them in that sense. If your readers would not understand the use of the term **Children** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could translate this plainly, as UST does.
10:25 f15k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 This entire verse is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize how difficult it is for a **rich** person **to enter into the kingdom of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses the difficulty of something happening.
10:25 t4y8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown εὐκοπώτερόν ἐστιν κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς ῥαφίδος διελθεῖν, ἢ πλούσιον εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν 1 This phrase **an eye of a needle** refers to the small hole at the end of a sewing **needle** through which the thread passes. If your readers are not familiar with camels and/or needles, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could state this in plain language without using hyperbole and express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “It is extremely difficult for a rich person to enter into the kingdom of God”
10:27 vfyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, although the term **men** is masculine, it is used with a generic sense to refer to people in general, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
10:28 hcv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 **Behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this.
10:30 sjhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ λάβῃ 1 The phrase **not receive** in this verse, when combined with the phrase “no one” in the previous verse, creates a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you can state the entire sentence positively. See the UST.
10:31 y2lu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ & ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Jesus is using the adjectives **first** and **last** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. See how you translated the words **first** and **last** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “many people who are now important will not be, and the people who are not now important, will be”
10:31 ym7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 Here, Jesus is using the words **first** and **last** metaphorically. See how you translated these words in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md).
10:32 hq7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ & ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 Some people were walking **behind** Jesus and his 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people who were following behind them”
10:32 k1nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md).
10:33 pv4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 **Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you”
10:33 qkq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀναβαίνομεν 1 When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form.
10:33 s1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 In speaking of himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles”
10:33 ha2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be handed over** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will deliver the Son of Man”
10:33 ohsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word, as modeled by the UST.
10:34 ccd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person αὐτῷ & αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & ἀναστήσεται 1 In this verse Jesus continues referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST.
10:34 t0lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμπαίξουσιν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to “the Gentiles” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will mock him”
10:34 xv2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναστήσεται 1 The phrase **he will rise** refers to rising from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will rise from being dead” or “he will rise from his grave”
10:35 li9k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive θέλομεν & αἰτήσωμέν & ἡμῖν 1 Here, the pronouns **we** and **us** refer only to James and John, and so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
10:36 he8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “to James and John”
10:37 xwf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ εἶπαν αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to James and John. Alternate translation: “And James and John said to him”
10:37 n1fv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δὸς ἡμῖν & καθίσωμεν 1 Here, the pronouns **us** and **we** refer only to James and John, so they would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
10:37 bb98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 The phrase **in your glory** refers to when Jesus is glorified and gloriously rules over his kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “beside you when you rule in your kingdom”
10:37 kyg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** in another way such as using a verbal form of the word. Alternate translation: “next to you when you are glorified” or “sit by you when you are glorified”
10:38 yvu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω 1 The phrase **to drink the cup** is an idiom which refers to suffering some experience which is difficult to undergo or experience. In the Bible, suffering is often referred to as “drinking from a cup.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “suffer as I will suffer” or “drink the cup of suffering that I will drink” or “drink from the cup of suffering from which I will drink”
10:38 pax6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι βαπτισθῆναι 1 The phrase **to be baptized with the baptism** is a metaphor which refers to being overwhelmed by difficult circumstances. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering and trials overwhelm a person. Here this metaphor for suffering refers specifically to Jesus’ future suffering in Jerusalem and his death by crucifixion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language.
10:38 hlue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι 1 The phrase **I am being baptized** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST.
10:39 r3pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **them** refer to James and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “James and John … to James and John”
10:39 hc1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ ποτήριον ὃ ἐγὼ πίνω, πίεσθε 1 **The cup that I drink** is an idiom. See how you translated this idiom in the previous verse.
10:39 c15v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 In this verse Jesus continues to use **baptism** to mean something more. See how you translated Jesus’ symbolic use of baptism in the previous verse.
10:39 humc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 The phrase **I am being baptized** and the phrase **you will be baptized** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state these two phrases in active form as modeled by the UST or you can express the meaning in another way that is natural in your language.
10:40 pdc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλ’ οἷς ἡτοίμασται 1 The word **{it}** refers to the places at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but those places are for those for whom they have been prepared by God”
10:40 eu9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 The phrase **it has been prepared** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says in [Matthew 20:23](../mat/20/23.md) that God the Father is the one who will prepare these places. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it”
10:41 ad19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀκούσαντες 1 The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly.
10:41 i48d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ δέκα 1 Here, **the ten** refers to the other ten disciples of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
10:42 zfr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the idea behind this abstract noun in another way, as modeled by the UST.
10:43 zfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ οὕτως & ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 The phrase **it is not this way among you** means “this is not the reality you live by as my followers” or “it should not be this way among you.” The phrase refers back to the way that Jesus said the Gentile rulers governed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But you live by a different set of principles than do the Gentile rulers” or “But you are to act differently than the Gentile rulers act”
10:43 gfun rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be your servant** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md) where it occurs with the same meaning and in a similar context. Alternate translation: “must be your servant”
10:44 e7sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἶναι πρῶτος 1 Here, **to be first** means being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important”
10:44 qzo8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [10:43](../10/43.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all”
10:44 u5yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔσται & δοῦλος 1 Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST.
10:45 ctta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST.
10:45 pmk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go οὐκ ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth”
10:45 a3fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διακονηθῆναι 1 The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him”
10:46 n4i3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Ἰερειχώ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “go” or “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went into Jericho”
10:46 bq3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐκπορευομένου αὐτοῦ 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “as he is coming out”
10:47 ow3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζαρηνός 1 The people call Jesus **Jesus the Nazarene** because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth”
10:47 opm0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Here, Mark uses **And** to introduce a reason-result statement. **And** introduces the reason, **having heard that it was Jesus**, which resulted in Bartimaeus beginning **to cry out and to say, “Son of David, Jesus, have mercy on me!”** When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason-result statement. Alternate translation: “So”
10:47 ynr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 The blind man is using the word **Son** to mean “descendant.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “Descendant of David”
10:47 vwz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυεὶδ 1 **David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title **Son of David** implicitly meant “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “Messiah”
10:47 ylls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλέησόν με 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** by using an adjective form such as “merciful” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “be merciful to me”
10:47 s2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἐλέησόν με 1 The phrase **have mercy** is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add a word such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please be merciful to me”
10:47 tvkh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 The blind man assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking to be healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “please have mercy on me and heal me” or “please be merciful to me by healing me”
10:48 ca5u ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ πολλοὶ ἵνα σιωπήσῃ 1 Alternate translation: “many people kept telling him not to shout”
10:48 m32u πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν 1 The phrase **was crying out much more** could mean: (1) that the blind man shouted even louder to Jesus. (2) that the blind man called out even more persistently. Alternate translation: “called out even more persistently”
10:48 l86a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με 1 See how you decided to translate this phrase in [10:47](../010/47.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah, please have mercy on me and heal me”
10:49 ac7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns φωνοῦσι 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who **they** refers to. Alternate translation: “some people in the crowd called” or “some people in the front of the crowd called”
10:49 n6xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάρσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **courage**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **courage** by using an adjective form such as “courageous” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “Be courageous”
10:52 s5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s **faith**. Jesus heals the man because the man believes that Jesus can heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you have believed in me”
10:52 bjuw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the meaning of **faith** some other way that is natural in your language.
11:intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [Mark 11:9–10](../mrk/11/09.md) and [Mark 11:17](../mrk/11/17.md), which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The donkey and the colt\n\nJesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.\n\nMatthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both; the donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1–7](../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1–7](../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29–36](../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14–15](../jhn/12/14.md))
11:1 ch4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐγγίζουσιν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near”
11:1 g1fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 The word **Bethphage** is the name of a village.
11:2 bi22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην 1 Your language may say “Come” rather than **Go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Come into the village”
11:2 si41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual ὑμῶν & εὑρήσετε 1 Since the word **you** applies to the two disciples in both of these instances, it would be dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
11:2 r41g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πῶλον 1 The term **colt** refers to a young donkey. If your readers would not be familiar with what a donkey is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a young donkey” or “a young riding animal”
11:2 yw78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Mark is using the word here in a generic sense, that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “no person has yet sat” or “no one has yet sat”
11:2 zloo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων οὔπω ἐκάθισεν 1 Jesus is using the term **sat** to refer to riding on an animal by association with the way people sit on an animal they are riding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no one of men has ever ridden”
11:3 aw3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? εἴπατε, ὅτι ὁ Κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει, καὶ εὐθὺς αὐτὸν ἀποστέλλει πάλιν ὧδε 1 This verse contains two direct quotations within a direct quotation. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two direct quotations in this verse as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “And if anyone asks you why you are untying the donkey, tell them that the Lord needs it and will send it back here as soon as he is done using it”
11:3 q446 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual ποιεῖτε 1 The villagers would be speaking to the two disciples, so **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural.
11:3 xw55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί ποιεῖτε τοῦτο? 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **doing this** refers to. Alternate translation: “Why are you untying and taking the colt”
11:3 k7fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔχει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **need**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requires it”
11:4 y381 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀπῆλθον 1 Here, **they** refers to the two disciples mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
11:7 k9g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 The word **cloaks** refers to outer garments. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “outer garments”
11:7 sbqy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιβάλλουσιν αὐτῷ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν 1 The disciples did this to show that the person riding the colt was special and important. In this culture, animals that important people rode were draped with rich fabrics. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “draped the colt with their cloaks as a sign of honor”
11:8 t8hy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν 1 Spreading **cloaks on the road** and **branches** was a way of showing honor to someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and others spread branches they had cut from the fields. They did this in order to honor Jesus”
11:8 jk2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction πολλοὶ τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν ἔστρωσαν εἰς τὴν ὁδόν, ἄλλοι δὲ στιβάδας κόψαντες ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν 1 The words **many**, **others**, and **they** all refer to other people besides the disciples. Alternate translation: “many people spread their cloaks on the road, and other people spread branches they had cut”
11:9 d8se rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate ὡσαννά 1 The word **Hosanna** is a Hebrew word. Mark spelled it out using Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded. **Hosanna** had an original meaning of “save now,” but by the time of this event it had become a way of praising God. In your translation you can spell **Hosanna** the way it sounds in your language or you could translate it according to how the word was used, as the UST does.
11:9 ye41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 The word **Blessed** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, “God” is the one doing the blessing.
11:9 suib εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 The phrase **Blessed is the one** could be: (1) a request for God to bless Jesus. Alternate translation: “May God bless the one who comes in his name” (2) stating that God had already blessed Jesus. Alternate translation: “God has blessed the one who comes in his name”
11:9 x1bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Here, the phrase **the one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Blessed are you, the one who comes”
11:9 e2p6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 Here, the phrase **in the name of** expresses authority. The phrase **in the name of the Lord** means “with the authority of the Lord.” If it would help in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or express this plainly. Alternate translation: “with the authority of the Lord” or “with the Lord’s authority”
11:10 kkfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογημένη 1 The word **Blessed** is passive in form. See how you translated this word in [11:9](../11/09.md).
11:10 a6b4 εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 The phrase **Blessed is the coming kingdom of our father David** could be: (1) an exclamation proclaiming that the future messianic kingdom promised to a descendant of David is blessed by God. (2) a prayer expressing the desire that God would bless the coming messianic kingdom. Alternate translation: “May God bless the coming kingdom of our father David”
11:10 yuap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Here, the term **father** means “ancestor.” If your readers would not understand the use of **father** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestor David”
11:10 b1si ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 See how you translated the word **Hosanna** in [11:9](../11/09.md). The phrase **Hosanna in the highest** could be (1) an exclamation of praise to God. (2) a prayer to God for salvation from Israel’s enemies. Alternate translation: “Please save us now, God in the highest”
11:10 vqm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 The phrase ** in the highest** is a way of referring to heaven, where God dwells. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state this explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
11:11 h2du rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἱερόν 1 Since only priests could enter the temple building, here the word **temple** means the temple courtyard. Mark is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly, as modeled by the UST.
11:11 t5nv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν 1 Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came to Bethany”
11:11 rvd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md).
11:12 zr8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθόντων αὐτῶν ἀπὸ Βηθανίας 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “when they had gone out from Bethany”
11:13 y447 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἦλθεν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he came”
11:13 yg5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθὼν ἐπ’ αὐτὴν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone to it”
11:13 j6cq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ φύλλα 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “he found only leaves”
11:14 u3bk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe εἶπεν αὐτῇ, μηκέτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι 1 Jesus is addressing an object that he knows cannot hear him, the fig tree, in order to teach his listeners something. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing this fact by talking about the fig tree. Alternate translation: “Jesus said regarding the fig tree that no one would ever eat fruit from it again” or “Jesus said regarding the fig tree that no one would ever eat fruit from it again”
11:14 b362 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 The phrase **to eternity** is a Jewish expression which means “forever.” In this context it specifically means “ever again.” Mark assumed his readers would be familiar with this expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of the expression **to eternity** explicitly. Alternate translation: “ever again”
11:14 ij5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηκέτι & ἐκ σοῦ μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι 1 The phrase **no one will any longer** is a double negative. Jesus uses a double negative here for emphasis. If is would be helpful in your language, you could translate the idea using only one negative statement and show the emphasis some other way. Alternate translation: “Surely, no one will eat from you”
11:15 hj7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they go into Jerusalem”
11:15 c2wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἱερὸν 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning.
11:15 ve56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning.
11:16 ohxg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἱεροῦ 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning.
11:17 xrz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? 1 **Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple, as recorded in the Old Testament Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have paid closer attention to the scripture which says.”
11:17 dxwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that his temple would be a place of prayer for all nations, but you have made it a ‘den of robbers’”
11:17 t9x9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ γέγραπται 1 If your readers might not understand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures”
11:17 qeix rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἶκός μου 1 God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his **house** because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple”
11:17 t1ho rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to a place where people would pray as a **house of prayer**. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me”
11:17 npdf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται 1 The phrase **will be called** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is probably best to say that people will call God’s temple a house of prayer, although it is also possible to say that God will call it that as well. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” or “Everyone will call my temple a house of prayer”
11:17 qvxz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προσευχῆς & πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **prayer**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “pray,” as modeled by the UST.
11:17 dpt1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s den or lair. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “a ‘place where thieves gather’”
11:18 k6dv ἐζήτουν πῶς 1 Alternate translation: “they were looking for a way by which”
11:20 s8ki rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν συκῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν 1 The phrase **the fig tree having withered from the roots** means that the **fig tree** had shriveled and dried up and looked dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the fig tree having withered down to its roots and having died” or “that the fig tree was dried and shriveled down to its roots and had completely died”
11:21 jt3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναμνησθεὶς 1 The phrase **having been reminded** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language.
11:21 na1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξήρανται 1 The phrase **has been withered away** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has withered away” or “has dried up” or “has died”
11:22 ry5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἔχετε πίστιν 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Have faith** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “Every one of you should have faith”
11:22 x8k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχετε πίστιν Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “Trust in God”
11:23 mred rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 Jesus is using hyperbole to teach. He is using an extreme example to emphasize to his disciples that God can do anything in response to believing prayer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “that whoever prays to God and says, ‘God please take up this mountain and throw it into the sea,’”
11:23 a01g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ, ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 Here, Jesus uses **mountain** to represent anything that would seem difficult or impossible to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to do it” or “that anyone of you who encounters a difficult task and asks God to accomplish it”
11:23 dwsf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 This would not be a command that the mountain would be capable of obeying. Instead, it would be a command that directly caused the mountain to be taken up and cast into the sea by the power of God. Alternate translation: “May God lift you up and throw you into the sea”
11:23 c3cj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ὄρει τούτῳ 1 Here, the phrase **this mountain** refers to the Mount of Olives, which was mentioned in [11:1](../11/01.md).
11:23 k3z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄρθητι καὶ βλήθητι εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 The phrases **Be taken up** and **be thrown** are both passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that “God” is the one who would do it. Alternate translation: “May God take you up and throw you into the sea”
11:23 y76p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ 1 In the expression **doubt in his heart**, the word **heart** represents a person’s mind or inner being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “if he does not doubt, but believes” or “if he truly believes within himself”
11:23 doeg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ διακριθῇ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύῃ 1 The phrase **not doubt** is a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “if he truly believes in his mind”
11:24 c61c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν & προσεύχεσθε & ἐλάβετε & ὑμῖν 1 In this verse, all four occurrences of the word **you** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these as plural.
11:24 abke rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular πιστεύετε 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the word **believe** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must believe”
11:24 tu5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔσται ὑμῖν 1 In the phrase **it will be to you**, the implication is that God will provide what is asked for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by UST.
11:25 m2aw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular στήκετε & ἔχετε & ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν & ὑμῶν 1 In this verse all occurrences of the word **you** and **your** are plural and apply to Jesus’ disciples. Your language may require you to mark these forms as plural.
11:25 m7xi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ὅταν στήκετε προσευχόμενοι 1 It is common in Hebrew culture to **stand** when **praying** to God. Jesus assumes that his readers would be familiar with this practice. If it would be helpful in your culture, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “when you are praying”
11:25 f6ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος 1 Here, **have something against anyone** refers to any anger, unforgiveness, or grudge a person holds **against** another person for offending or sinning against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly.
11:25 ttxg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀφίετε 1 In this verse, the first occurrence of the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “each of you must forgive”
11:25 swa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀφίετε 1 In the original language in which the author of Mark wrote this Gospel, the word **forgive** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “every one of you must forgive”
11:25 jjs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says **forgive** with the goal that **your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses.** Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
11:25 omze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned”
11:27 alh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase, **he is walking around in the temple** means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard. Jesus was not walking in the temple, since only priests were allowed inside the temple building. See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:15](../11/15.md).
11:28 se9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς 1 The question **By what authority do you do these things**, and the question **who gave you this authority** could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, or who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?”
11:28 ooxp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ & ἐξουσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way.
11:29 erqp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way.
11:29 aak2 ἕνα λόγον 1 Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question”
11:30 vpgv τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?”
11:30 jj91 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου 1 Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed”
11:30 sh7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** to represent God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from God”
11:30 i5is rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” or “humans”
11:30 mc8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀποκρίθητέ μοι 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this book, the word **Answer** is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people.
11:31 s9vv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then for what reason did you not believe him’”
11:31 e7j4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us for what reason we did not believe him”
11:31 nu1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 See how you translated **heaven** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God”
11:32 tczm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men’”
11:32 aus1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 The phrase **From men** refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’”
11:32 v2gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 See how you translated the phrase **From men** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From people”
11:32 b5qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people”
11:32 z93u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? 1 The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good”
11:32 z998 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν 1 The author of the Gospel of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet”
11:32 dqlt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people”
11:32 x4bo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον 1 Here, the word **all** refers to the people in the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for everyone in the crowd held” or “for all those who were in the crowd believed”
11:33 rmbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Here, Mark uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentences described. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-and-result relationship. Alternate translation: “So”
11:33 us4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἴδαμεν 1 The reply **We do not know** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” or “We do not know where John’s authority to baptize came from”
11:33 av5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 With the words **Nor do I tell you**, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you”
11:33 arpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way.
12:intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10–11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Hypothetical situations\n\nHypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so their listeners can imagine them happening and learn lessons from them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The son of David as Lord\n\nA paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a Psalm that records David calling his son “Lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, Mark 12:35–37, Jesus is trying to help his hearers understand that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So, David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.”
12:1 w2hb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nTo help the people understand what the Jewish leaders were doing by rejecting him and John the Baptist, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told the people stories to help them understand better. He began”
12:1 qa93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν 1 Jesus uses the phrase **A man planted a vineyard** to introduce the main character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character in a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard”
12:1 l2i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς 1 As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use his vineyard in exchange for a share of the crop”
12:1 fd71 γεωργοῖς 1 While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine dressers” or “grape farmers”
12:2 s83v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ καιρῷ 1 This refers to the time of harvest. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made clear, as modeled by the UST.
12:2 oxoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καρπῶν 1 The word **fruits** could be: (1) literal. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce”
12:3 c321 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπέστειλαν κενόν 1 Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Here, the word **empty** means that they did not give him any of the fruit from the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what it means to be **empty** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything”
12:6 z5hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν υἱόν μου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “thinking that they would respect his son” or “thinking to himself that the farmers would respect his son”
12:7 m63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖνοι δὲ οἱ γεωργοὶ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἶπαν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρονομία 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that this happened after the owner sent his son and the son arrived, as the UST does.
12:7 s5dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ κληρονομία 1 By **inheritance**, the farmers mean “the vineyard”, which the son would inherit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “this vineyard, which he would inherit”
12:8 gx6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Jesus uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described, specifically that the farmers carried out the plan that they had decided on. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a reason-and-result relationship. Alternate translation: “So”
12:9 r4md rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί οὖν ποιήσει ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος? 1 Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them:” or “So I will tell you what the owner of the vineyard will do.”
12:9 g4ce rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις 1 See how you translated the similar expression in [12:1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “allow different grape farmers to use it in exchange for a share of the crop”
12:9 mc5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δώσει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλλοις 1 The word **others** refers to other vine dressers who will care for the vineyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will give the vineyard to other farmers to care for it”
12:10 v6ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read the scripture that says that a stone that the builders rejected became the cornerstone”
12:10 xj9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τὴν Γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνωτε: 1 Jesus does not want the Jewish leaders to tell him whether or not they have read the scripture he quotes to them. He knows that they have read the scripture. He is using the question form for emphasis and to rebuke them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “And surely you have read this scripture!” or “And you should remember this scripture!” or “And you should pay attention to this scripture!”
12:10 mzr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 This quotation from Psalm 118 is a metaphor. It speaks of the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject the Messiah. The Psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, which is the most important stone in the building. This means that God will make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explicit explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text.
12:10 kv7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 This Psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “A stone that the builders thought was not good enough to use for building”
12:10 l5ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The phrase the **head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building”
12:11 r8z8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη, καὶ ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 This entire verse is a continuation of Jesus’ quotation from Psalm 118. If you chose not to translate [12:10](../12/10.md) as a quotation within a quotation, then you should do the same with this verse. Alternate translation: “and which says that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled as they looked at it” or “and that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled when they saw what the Lord had done”
12:11 k5w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **eyes** represent “seeing,” so the expression **in our eyes** refers to the perspective of the person seeing the event. Alternate translation: “from our perspective, it is marvelous” or “we see that it is wonderful”
12:12 b1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.”
12:12 lx62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. The religious leaders fear of the crowd is why they **left** Jesus and **went away**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “and because they were afraid of the crowd, they did not seize him” or “and they did not seize him, because they feared the crowd”
12:12 v9wb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν. καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to show the logical sequence of events, as modeled by the UST.
12:12 v5wv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 Here, Mark uses the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and the reason why they were not able to do so. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “yet they were afraid of what the people might do”
12:13 z2sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ἀποστέλλουσιν 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders,” as modeled by the UST.
12:13 pj3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 The term **the Herodians** means those who supported the Roman Empire and Herod Antipas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
12:13 kuy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα αὐτὸν ἀγρεύσωσιν 1 Here, Mark describes tricking Jesus as trapping him. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what **to trap him** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to trick him”
12:13 s1hb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, Mark uses the term **word** to mean something Jesus might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in something he might say” or “with something he might say”
12:14 dh3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche λέγουσιν 1 Mark could mean that one person spoke to Jesus on behalf of the whole group. So instead of **they**, you could say “one of them says,” as the UST does.
12:14 awv5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 The spies are speaking only of themselves, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction.
12:14 cp3x οὐ μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός 1 Alternate translation: “you do not try to earn people’s favor, but rather, you fearlessly teach the truth without worrying about people’s opinion”
12:14 xptc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων 1 The phrase **not look at the face of men** is a Hebrew expression that means “to not give attention to people’s outward appearances.” “Outward appearance” in this context refers to social position and whether or not a person was wealthy or influential or had a high social and/or religious position. This phrase, taken as a whole here, means that Jesus was impartial in his judgement and teaching and did not show favoritism. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for you pay no attention to external things when you speak” or “for you do not regard people’s position or status when you teach”
12:14 qvpo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the term **face** means “external status and position.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the status and social position of people”
12:14 brm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the word is used here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people”
12:14 yfnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the Jewish leaders speak of how God wants people to live as if it were a **way** or path that people should follow. If it would help your readers to understand what **way** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how God wants people to live”
12:14 ap2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπ’ ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you can express the same idea with an adverb such as “truthfully,” as modeled by the UST or in some other way that is natural in your language.
12:14 k0tw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξεστιν 1 The Jewish leaders are asking about God’s law, not the law of the Roman government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Does God’s law permit us”
12:14 gtsk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Καίσαρι 1 The Jewish leaders were referring to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
12:15 g48w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν, εἶπεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hypocrisy**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But Jesus knew that they were not being sincere, so he said” or “But Jesus realized that they were trying to trick him, and so he said”
12:15 c7nj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί με πειράζετε? 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as a rebuke and for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for these purposes in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I know that you are trying to make me say something wrong so you can accuse me!”
12:15 wl34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney δηνάριον 1 A **denarius** was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage for a laborer. Alternate translation: “a Roman coin”
12:16 gi96 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Καίσαρος 1 Here, **Caesar’s** refers to Caesar’s likeness and inscription. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They are Caesar’s likeness and inscription”
12:17 fl4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ Καίσαρος ἀπόδοτε Καίσαρι 1 See how you translated **Caesar** in [12:14](../12/14.md). Alternate translation: “The things that belong to the Roman government, give back to the Roman government”
12:17 la16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and give to God the things that belong to God”
12:18 edcn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 Mark provides this background information about the Sadducees to help readers understand what happens in this episode. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “who belong to a sect which denies the resurrection of the dead”
12:18 y8yo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδδουκαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 Mark uses the words **Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, come to him** to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees, who say there is no resurrection, then came to Jesus”
12:18 ss09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Σαδδουκαῖοι & οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “Sadducees, men who believe that no one will rise from the dead”
12:18 rdl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἵτινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 The word **resurrection** refers to becoming alive again after being dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
12:18 ax25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche λέγοντες 1 Mark may be using the singular **saying** to mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group. You could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus”
12:19 e8x2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν 1 These Sadducees are referring to the law that Moses wrote as if Moses had written directly to them. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law”
12:19 m8fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν 1 Here, the word **us** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducees mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew.
12:19 kgws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ, καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα καὶ μὴ ἀφῇ τέκνον 1 Alternate translation: “if a man’s brother dies who was married but who did not have children”
12:19 g49e ἵνα λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα 1 Alternate translation: “that man should marry his brother’s widow” or “that the man should marry his dead brother’s wife”
12:19 m2um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The Sadducees assume that Jesus will know that this law specified that if the widow had children by her dead husband’s brother, those children would be considered the children of her dead husband. Alternate translation: “and have children who will be considered his brother’s descendants”
12:19 r0tg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. If it would help your readers to understand what **seed** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “offspring”
12:20 wz27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοὶ ἦσαν; καὶ ὁ πρῶτος ἔλαβεν γυναῖκα, καὶ ἀποθνῄσκων, οὐκ ἀφῆκεν σπέρμα 1 While the Sadducees describe this as if it happened, they are actually asking about a hypothetical possibility in order to test Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose there were seven brothers, and the oldest brother got married, but he died before he had any children”
12:20 pj71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ πρῶτος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the first brother” or “the oldest brother”
12:20 pj2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὁ πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number one”
12:20 af1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants”
12:21 uef6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo καὶ 1 The Sadducees are continuing to describe a hypothetical situation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And suppose that”
12:21 d61g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ δεύτερος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second brother” or “the next oldest brother”
12:21 na6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number two” or “the next oldest brother”
12:21 cgzm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants”
12:21 tbzw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως 1 The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the third brother married this widow but also died before they had any children”
12:21 l1ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ τρίτος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother”
12:21 hx1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὁ τρίτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother”
12:22 wjq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ ἑπτὰ 1 The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers”
12:22 l3dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants”
12:23 w4wu ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει 1 The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a **resurrection**. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead”
12:23 c4p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ & ἑπτὰ 1 The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers”
12:24 zp2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God!”
12:24 sie3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the Scriptures or God’s power”
12:25 nvh6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὅταν γὰρ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῶσιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 Both uses of the pronoun **they** refer to men and women in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “For when men and women rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage” or “For when people rise from the dead, they neither marry nor are given in marriage”
12:25 ox82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who have died”
12:25 y8vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, but your culture does use different expressions for men and women when they marry, you can use two different active verbal forms here, and you can say who does the action in the second case. Alternate translation: “men marry wives and parents give their daughters in marriage to husbands”
12:25 ensg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 In this culture, the idiom was to say that men married their wives and that women were given in marriage to their husbands by their parents. If your culture does not use different expressions like that, you could use a single term here. Alternate translation: “they do not get married”
12:25 asw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλ’ εἰσὶν ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that angels do not marry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they will be like the angels, who do not marry”
12:25 pi8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what is currently the case on earth. Jesus is using this contrast to show the Sadducees that the were mistaken to think that the existence of men and women in heaven would follow the same pattern or order of things as had their former lives on earth. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather”
12:26 mffe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the phrase **the dead** in [12:25](../12/25.md). Alternate translation: “people who have died”
12:26 z36n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῶν νεκρῶν, ὅτι ἐγείρονται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who does the action. Alternate translation: “the matter of God bringing back to life people who have died”
12:26 eod4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here for emphasis in order to rebuke the Sadducees for not correctly understanding the Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have surely read in the book of Moses”
12:26 jc5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ βίβλῳ Μωϋσέως 1 Here, Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **the book** that **Moses** wrote, the Pentateuch. Jesus is not using the possessive form to indicate a book that Moses owned. If this is not clear in your language, you could clarify this in your translation, as modeled by the UST.
12:26 w2lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοῦ βάτου 1 Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that he means the **bush** in the desert that was burning without being consumed, the place at which Moses first encountered God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the burning bush”
12:26 y35v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs λέγων 1 In many languages, it is conventional to use the present tense to describe what a writer does within a composition. However, if that would not be natural in your language, you could use the past tense here. Alternate translation: “and he called out”
12:26 re82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ 1 The implication is that God would not have identified himself as the God of these men if they were not alive. This must mean that God brought them back to life after they died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does.
12:27 dgc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “people who have died”
12:27 xxzs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ζώντων 1 Jesus is using the adjective **living** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “people who are alive” or “people whom he has brought back to life”
12:27 v7ui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πολὺ πλανᾶσθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You misunderstand”
12:28 zqy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants καὶ & εἷς τῶν γραμματέων 1 Mark uses the statement **And one of the scribes** to introduce this new character into the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. The expression “one of the scribes” identifies him as a teacher who had carefully studied the law of Moses. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to him as something like “A man who taught the Jewish laws,” as the UST does.
12:28 b3yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἰδὼν 1 Here, Mark is using the word **seen** to mean “observed” or “knew.” He is describing something a person would perceive with their mind by association with their eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “having understood”
12:28 q1u5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων 1 Here, the scribe is using the word **first** to mean “most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of **first** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning using plain language, as the UST does.
12:28 kftz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ποία ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language.
12:29 ztyh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρώτη 1 Here, Jesus continues the use of the word **first**. See how you translated the phrase **the first** in [12:28](../12/28.md), where it is used with the same meaning.
12:29 euim rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρώτη 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The first commandment is this”
12:29 n74y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πρώτη 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase **the first** in [12:28](../12/28.md), where it is used with the same meaning.
12:29 mq92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἰσραήλ 1 Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God addresses all of the people of Israel by the name of their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “O Israelites” or “descendants of Israel”
12:29 mmtb Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν 1 The phrase **the Lord our God, the Lord is one** could be: (1) an affirmation of the exclusiveness of the Lord as Israel’s God for the purpose of reminding Israel that the Lord was to be the only God they should worship. Alternate translation: “the Lord alone is our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is special”
12:30 thj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction.
12:30 xjng rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου 1 Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring to the entirety of a person by listing different parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with the entirety of your being” or “completely, with your entire person”
12:30 q49v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the desires and motives. Alternate translation: “with all your desires” or “zealously”
12:30 x3n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ψυχῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “essence” or “being”
12:30 ln0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διανοίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thoughts”
12:30 mii2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἰσχύος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power” or “ability”
12:31 eu8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis δευτέρα αὕτη 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this”
12:31 fz8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δευτέρα 1 Here, Jesus is using the word **second** to mean “second most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of **second** in this context, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The second most important commandment”
12:31 oegh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal δευτέρα 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **second**, you can express the meaning behind the word **second** in a way that would be natural in your language.
12:31 np4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself”
12:31 tp6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction.
12:31 pyc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τούτων 1 Here, the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
12:32 qqm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST.
12:32 as2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος 1 The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god”
12:33 v8yn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅλης τῆς καρδίας 1 See how you translated the phrase **whole heart** in [12:30](../12/30.md).
12:33 xnq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns συνέσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **understanding**, you can express the same idea in another way, as the UST does.
12:33 k42a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος 1 See how you translated the phrase **whole strength** in [12:30](../12/30.md).
12:33 ekfy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸ ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτὸν 1 The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to love your neighbor as you love yourself”
12:34 hkf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἰδὼν αὐτὸν 1 See how you translated the use of the word **seen** in [12:28](../12/28.md) where it is used with the same figurative meaning. Alternate translation: “having understood him” or “having observed him”
12:34 b144 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adverb **far**. Alternate translation: “You are very close to the kingdom of God”
12:34 is4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Jesus speaks of the man being almost ready to submit to God as being physically close to **the kingdom of God**. Jesus is speaking of **the kingdom of God** as if it were a physical place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are close to submitting to God as king”
12:34 lfti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **kingdom**, you can express the same idea in another way, as the UST does.
12:34 rgh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα 1 If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid”
12:35 ptc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning.
12:35 q6e4 πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν? 1 This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement.
12:35 i6a4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Here, Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what **son** means in this context, you could express its meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “a descendant of David”
12:36 e1zq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ”
12:36 jlbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he put his enemies under his feet”
12:36 dv7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said Lord instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” The ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord”
12:36 v53p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me”
12:36 k2j1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 In this quotation, Yahweh is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate his right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sit at my right side”
12:36 rfy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 Placing an enemy under one’s feet represents conquering them and making them submit. Here, it means that Yahweh would make His enemies stop resisting the Messiah and force them to submit to him. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you”
12:37 j7wn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David himself calls the Messiah his Lord”
12:37 ka5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λέγει αὐτὸν 1 Here, the word **him** refers to the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST does.
12:37 ssq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 See how you translated the word **himself** in [12:36](../12/36.md), where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person” or “David, whom we all respect”
12:37 qpdy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον, καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? 1 In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone **Lord** was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox. That is, it is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David respectfully addresses the Messiah as his Lord, but David should be more respected than his descendant. So why does David address him that way?”
12:37 rh2t καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 Like the question in [12:35](../12/35.md), this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant”
12:37 qucc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Jesus is using the word **and** to show that a conclusion should be made as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Use a natural form in your language for showing this. Alternate translation: “so”
12:37 tjp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor υἱός 1 Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant,” as he did in [12:35](../12/35.md). See how you translated the term **son** there. Alternate translation: “descendant”
12:38 bh8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 Mark uses the word **And** to indicate that Jesus is still sitting in the temple area taking to the people, as he was in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Then”
12:38 rwxq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular βλέπετε 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Watch out** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you watch out for” or “Every one of you watch out for”
12:38 yhfv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων 1 Jesus says **Watch out** to warn about the influence of certain people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes”
12:38 nxy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν 1 In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in **long robes** was to assert one’s right to high status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes”
12:38 mu5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀσπασμοὺς 1 The implication is that these would be respectful **greetings** in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “respectful greetings”
12:39 mwmf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρωτοκαθεδρίας & πρωτοκλισίας 1 Both uses of the word **first** here mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places”
12:40 jtw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 Jesus speaks of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own”
12:40 j27b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 Jesus says that the scribes are **devouring** or eating up the possessions of widows. He means that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own”
12:40 r3ht καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι 1 Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they are offering long prayers”
12:40 qm52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 Jesus is using the word **condemnation** to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment”
12:40 h36x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly”
12:41 r69x rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nMark uses the word **And** to introduce background information that will help his readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now”
12:41 nohd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου, ἐθεώρει πῶς ὁ ὄχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον; καὶ πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον πολλά 1 This background information introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “after Jesus sat down he was watching the crowd put money into the offering box and noticing that there were many rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes”
12:41 p2kp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου & τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον 1 Mark is speaking of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God. He associates the boxes with **the treasury**, the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes”
12:41 w4xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people,” as modeled by the UST.
12:41 jgkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πλούσιοι 1 Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people,” as the UST does. Alternate translation: “wealthy people”
12:41 rl1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πολλά 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money”
12:42 g6ry rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 The word **lepta** is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value”
12:42 n29e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated.
12:43-44 ipl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does.
12:43 ih0m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ χήρα αὕτη ἡ πτωχὴ 1 Even though it is not literally true that the widow has put more money into the offering box than all the rich people, this is still not figurative language. As Jesus explains in the next verse, he means that she has put in proportionately more than all the others, relative to her means, and that is literally true. But Jesus makes the seemingly untrue statement first, using it to get his disciples to reflect on how it can be true. So it would be appropriate to translate Jesus’ words directly and not interpret them as if they were figurative. For example, it would be a figurative interpretation to say, “God considers what this poor widow has given to be more valuable than the gifts of all the others”
12:43 n8z5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντων & τῶν βαλλόντων 1 In context, **all** means specifically all of the rich people who were putting large monetary gifts in the collection boxes. Alternate translation: “all of those rich people putting”
12:44 c7jj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason for what Jesus said in [12:43](../12/43.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Because”
12:44 ihuq ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον 1 Alternate translation: “had a lot of money but only gave a small portion of it”
12:44 ui9a αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 Alternate translation: “but she who had only had a very little money gave everything she had to live on”
12:44 l4tp τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς 1 Alternate translation: “her lack” or “the little she had”
13:intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24–25, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The return of Christ\n\nJesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6–37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
13:1 ql81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί 1 Here, **stones** refers to the very large stones with which the temple walls were built. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How wonderful these huge stones are and how wonderful these buildings are”
13:2 rez6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and to emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings!”
13:2 xdhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Your enemies will not leave one stone upon another here, but will tear them down”
13:3 izt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν κατ’ ἰδίαν Πέτρος, καὶ Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀνδρέας 1 Here, the pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as Jesus was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew were privately asking him”
13:4 uf37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 Both occurrences of the phrase **these things** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **these things** refers to, as the UST models.
13:4 lw1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “when God is about to complete all these things”
13:5 fe42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγειν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, John, and Andrew, who are mentioned in [13:3](../13/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to say to these four disciples”
13:5 qekc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular βλέπετε 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Be careful** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that”
13:6 z63u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Here Jesus uses the word **name** to mean identity and the authority that comes with the identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me”
13:6 cee7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes πολλοὶ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Many will come in my name claiming to be me”
13:6 pbz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοὶ & πολλοὺς 1 Here both uses of the word **Many** refer to “many people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly, as the UST does.
13:6 wv12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah”
13:7 fl5h πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 The phrase **wars and rumors of wars** could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away”
13:7 d1k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later”
13:7 mi4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 Here, **the end** implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models.
13:8 ydrb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other”
13:8 rlxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations”
13:8 oyrd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται & ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations”
13:8 xln4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’ 1 The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations”
13:8 e2ln rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms”
13:8 hz6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms”
13:8 wpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The term **kingdom** represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms”
13:8 pcyi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **These things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described”
13:8 dz8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα 1 Jesus uses the metaphor of **birth pains** because, in the same way that the pain of childbirth is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually be replaced by joy when Christ returns. Because childbirth occurs in all cultures, you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” or “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to give birth to a child”
13:9 nuti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”
13:9 c2cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular βλέπετε & ἑαυτούς 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **watch yourselves** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you, watch yourselves”
13:9 ulws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus uses the word **yourselves** to draw the disciples’ attention to themselves, because he now transitions away from telling them about general signs and begins telling them about specific trials that they will personally encounter. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “But give heed to yourselves personally”
13:9 mbr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς 1 The pronoun **They** refers to people in general who will persecute Jesus’ followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “People will deliver you”
13:9 voih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δαρήσεσθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will beat you”
13:9 zdp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σταθήσεσθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will make you stand”
13:9 gbb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ & σταθήσεσθε 1 Here, **made to stand before** means to be put on trial and judged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be put on trial before” or “you will be brought to trial and judged by”
13:9 v23p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you can express the same idea in another way as the UST does or use a verb form such as “testify.” Alternate translation: “to testify”
13:9 y6p6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the **governors** and **kings** mentioned in this verse.
13:10 ruk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal πρῶτον 1 Here, Jesus uses the ordinal number **first** in order to indicate position in an order of events. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can express this same idea in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before the end comes”
13:10 sfjc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that believers will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “believers to proclaim the gospel”
13:10 e6ad rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 The term **nations** refers to the people within each nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all nations” or “people within each nation”
13:11 uy91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παραδιδόντες 1 Here, **handing {you} over** means to deliver you to the control of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities”
13:11 m0xq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit gives”
13:11 nr2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models.
13:11 q2o3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 The phrase **for you are not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say”
13:11 a9b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you”
13:12 toqp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed”
13:12 py9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς 1 Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
13:12 m6iq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters will deliver their siblings”
13:12 utyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάνατον & θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the same idea with a verb form. Alternate translation: “be killed … have them killed”
13:12 b9ux rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πατὴρ τέκνον 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “a father will deliver up his child to death”
13:12 hrhw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πατὴρ τέκνον 1 Although the term **father** is masculine, Jesus is probably using the word here in a generic sense that includes both fathers and mothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “parents, their children” or “fathers and mothers will deliver their children to the authorities to be killed”
13:12 vjcw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 Here, **children will rise up against parents and put them to death** probably does not mean that children will directly murder their parents. Rather, this probably means that children will deliver their parents to people in positions of authority and then these people will have their parents killed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
13:12 r66s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς 1 Here, **rise up** means to stand up. In this culture, people would stand up to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain that this will be the reason for their action. Alternate translation: “children will stand up to testify against their parents”
13:13 pk3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all will hate you”
13:13 w8pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 Here, **all** is an exaggeration which Jesus uses to emphasize to his disciples the fact that many people will hate them because they believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language, as modeled by the UST.
13:13 jhp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** is a way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with that person, their name. Jesus is using the phrase **my name** to refer to himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “because of me”
13:13 w28q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end”
13:13 c33n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 Here, **endured** represents having continued to be faithful to God even while suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end”
13:13 vcz4 ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 The phrase **to the end** could mean: (1) to the end of one’s life. Alternate translation: “who endures to the point of death” or “who endures till death” (2) until the end of time. This meaning means that believers must endure and keep on enduring until the time when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “who keeps on enduring to the very end” (3) to the end of that time of hardship and persecution. Alternate translation: “who endures until the time of testing is over”
13:14 d4nw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως 1 The phrase **the abomination of desolation** is from the book of Daniel. Jesus’ audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the temple”
13:14 vx3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ 1 Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where he should not be standing”
13:14 ck7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω 1 The phrase **let the one reading understand** is not Jesus speaking. Mark added this to get the readers’ attention so that they would pay attention to this warning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show that this is not part of Jesus’ direct speech by putting brackets around this phrase, as the UST and ULT do, or you could show your readers in some other way that is natural in your language.
13:15 m1hq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ καταβάτω, μηδὲ εἰσελθάτω ἆραί τι ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ 1 Where Jesus lived, the tops of houses were flat. People would eat and do other activities on top of their houses. Jesus assumes that his hearers know this and that they know that the roofs were accessed by an exterior staircase at the back of the house, distant from the entry at the front. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the person who is on top of their roof should escape immediately and not enter their house to get anything”
13:16 y1e9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 The word **cloak** refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coat” or “outer garment”
13:17 bi8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις 1 The phrase **having in the womb** is an idiom meaning the woman is with child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant”
13:17 bv9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῖς θηλαζούσαις 1 This does not mean babies who are nursing but rather refers to women who provide their milk for their babies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “mothers who are nursing their babies”
13:17 u8kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Jesus is using the term **those days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that time”
13:18 w47v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος 1 If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving all of this verse to the end of the next verse, since in the next verse Jesus gives the reason for praying this prayer. You would then present the combined verses as 18–19.
13:18 w91r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown χειμῶνος 1 In the location to which Jesus is referring, **winter** is the time of year when it is cold, and travel is difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which it would be difficult to travel or you could translate **winter** with a general expression such as “in the cold season.” Alternate translation: “in the cold season” or “in the rainy season”
13:19 zs4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι 1 See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md), where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time”
13:19 l5u9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θλῖψις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST.
13:19 e98e οἵα οὐ γέγονεν τοιαύτη 1 Alternate translation: “of a kind that has not yet happened” or “which will be worse than any type of suffering that has happened”
13:19 r1ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST.
13:19 c5sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ μὴ γένηται 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “there will never be days like these again” or “after this tribulation, there will never again be a tribulation like it”
13:20 el7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας & τὰς ἡμέρας 1 See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “that time … that time”
13:20 kda6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Jesus is describing people by reference to something associated with them, the **flesh** they are made of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no one would be saved” or “no people would be saved”
13:20 dosx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark makes clear that “the Lord” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “because the Lord will shorten the day, not everyone will die”
13:20 q8hm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Here, the phrase **be saved** refers to being saved from physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone would die” or “no one would survive”
13:20 fz5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase to express the idea and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the people whom he chose”
13:20 af7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as modeled by the UST.
13:21-22 d9gr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 21–22 as the UST does.
13:21 qsfu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is either here or there” or “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is in this location or that location”
13:21 yfd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἴδε, ἐκεῖ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Behold, there is the Christ”
13:22 yw81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγερθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will arise” or “will come”
13:22 n81i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 See how you translated the phrase **the elect** in [13:20](../13/20.md).
13:23 jq8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βλέπετε 1 See how you translated the word **watch** in [13:9](../13/09.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “be watchful” or “be alert”
13:23 va6h προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα 1 Alternate translation: “I have told you all these things ahead of time” or “I have told you all these things before they happen”
13:24 is3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** shows a contrast between the events Jesus has just described and the events he will describe in [13:24–27](../013/24.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet”
13:24 vmna rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time”
13:24 n2rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential μετὰ 1 The word **after** indicates that the events Jesus will describe in [13:24–27](../013/24.md) will come after the events just described in [13:14–23](../013/14.md). The word **after** does not express how long it will be before the events of [13:24–27](../013/24.md) take place so you should choose a word or phrase in your language that communicates the sequential meaning of the word **after** but does not limit the time frame.
13:24 mfy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “suffer” as modeled by the UST.
13:24 zy2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it.
13:24 a3qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς 1 Here, the **moon** is spoken of as if it were alive and able to give something to someone else. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the moon will become dark”
13:25 hge7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism αἱ δυνάμεις 1 Here, **the powers** could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and planets in which case the two phrases **the stars will be falling from the sky** and **the powers that are in the sky will be shaken** are an example of parallelism. Alternate translation: “the sun, moon, stars, and planets” (2) spiritual beings. Alternate translation: “the spiritual beings”
13:25 au6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will cause the powers that are in the heavens to be shaken”
13:26 kl95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τότε ὄψονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people of the nations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the people of the nations will see”
13:26 a130 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST.
13:26 nlo7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐρχόμενον ἐν νεφέλαις 1 Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that the phrase **coming in clouds** means **coming** down from heaven **in clouds**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “coming down from heaven in clouds”
13:26 cd1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 The phrase **with much power and glory** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The term **glory** describes what kind of **power** Jesus will have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with very glorious power” or “shining brightly because he is so powerful” or, if you decided to use the first person, “with majesty and splendor” or “with awesome might and supreme honor”
13:26 h4z1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** or **glory**, you can express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **power** and **glory** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “to show he is very powerful and everyone should praise him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “to show I am very powerful and everyone should praise me”
13:27 nsyo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους καὶ ἐπισυνάξει τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST.
13:27 a1z2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς 1 See how you translated the word **elect** in [13:20](../13/20.md).
13:27 vpb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων 1 The phrase **the four winds** is a figurative way of referring to the four directions: north, south, east, and west; it means “everywhere.” Jesus speaks, using these directions in order to include everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the north, south, east, and west”
13:27 u1vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ 1 The phrase **from the four winds** and the phrase **from the end of the earth to the end of heaven** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “from everywhere” or “from wherever they are”
13:28 c99s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς συκῆς, μάθετε τὴν παραβολήν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nTo teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember, Jesus now gives a brief illustration. Consider the best way to introduce this parable in your language. Alternate translation: “Now I want you to learn this truth which the fig tree illustrates”
13:28 u8ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῆς συκῆς 1 Jesus is speaking of these trees in general, not one particular **fig tree**. Alternate translation: “fig trees”
13:29 w1k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 Here, the word translated **it** could: (1) refer to the coming of the Son of Man and the gathering of the elect, as described in [13:26–27](../13/26.md). Alternate translation: “his coming is near” or (if you expressed Son of Man in the first person) “my coming is near” (2) be translated as “he” and refer to the Son of Man. Alternate translation: “he is near” or (if you expressed Son of Man in the first person) “I am near”
13:29 iavl γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἐπὶ θύραις. 1 The phrase **at the doors** adds further detail to the phrase **he is near**. The phrase **at the doors** explains how **near** he is.
13:29 z2pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπὶ θύραις 1 The phrase **at the doors** is an idiom which means that something or someone is very near, ready to enter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and is ready to enter” or “and waiting at the door”
13:30 m7ux rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ 1 Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in a certain generation. This could mean: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening” (2) “the people who are alive now”
13:30 h72r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ 1 Jesus is referring to death as passing away. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die”
13:30 h7dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, μέχρις 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “this generation will still be alive when”
13:31 k4zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται 1 Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist”
13:31 ah6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 Jesus is using the term **words** to refer to what he has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “but everything that I have said will always continue to be true”
13:31 cq65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will remain forever” or “will always be true”
13:32 km5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας 1 The phrase **that day** refers to the time when Jesus will return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the day or hour when I will return”
13:32 z3q9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 Here, **heaven** refers to the place where God lives; it does not refer to the sky.
13:32 c1b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱός 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “me” or “I”
13:33 pj0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγρυπνεῖτε 1 Jesus is using the expression **Stay awake** in a figurative sense. If your readers would not understand what it means to **Stay awake** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be watchful” or “Remain alert”
13:33 i43k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πότε ὁ καιρός ἐστιν 1 Here, **the time** refers to Christ’s second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
13:34 ygl0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδημος 1 To help his disciples understand how they should live while they wait for his second coming, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told his disciples this story to help them understand how they should live while they were waiting for his return: ‘As a man on a journey’” or “Then Jesus told his disciples this story to help them understand what their attitude should be like while they waited for him to return: ‘As a man on a journey’”
13:34 iwt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς 1 Here, Jesus uses the word **As** to introduce a comparison. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a comparison. Alternate translation: “It is like”
13:34 huof rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδημος 1 Jesus is speaking of a **man** or person in general, not of one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “It is like when a person decides to go on a journey, and before leaving their house, that person asks their servants to manage the house. And the person gives each servant their responsibilities and commands the door-keeper to stay alert”
13:34 w4dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ δοὺς τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST.
13:35 z7wi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **therefore** indicates that Jesus is about to tell his disciples how to apply the story he told in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for introducing an application. Alternate translation: “As a result” of “And so”
13:35 c96l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γρηγορεῖτε οὖν; οὐκ οἴδατε γὰρ 1 What follows the word **because** here is the reason that Jesus wants his disciples to **stay alert**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing the reason given for doing something. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “therefore, stay alert! The reason you should stay alert is because”
13:35 gx23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ κύριος τῆς οἰκίας ἔρχεται 1 By calling himself **the lord of the house** Jesus is identifying himself as the “man on a journey” in the story he told in the previous verse. Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the lord of the house, will return”
13:35 v6it rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 Speaking of a **rooster crowing**, Jesus is referring to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at daybreak” or “at first light”
13:35 s8j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 A **rooster** is a large bird, a male chicken, which calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “when the birds begin to sing”
13:36 mh8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθεύδοντας 1 Jesus is using the expression **sleeping** to mean “not ready.” If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sleeping** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unprepared for his return”
13:36 wd97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person εὕρῃ 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST.
14:intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus\n\n[Mark 14:22–25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This is my blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.\n\n### The new covenant\n\nSome people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Abba, Father\n\n“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n### “Son of Man”\n\nJesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
14:1 hwb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nMark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information.
14:1 xa8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν δὲ τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὰ Ἄζυμα μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας. καὶ ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 During **the Festival of Unleavened Bread** the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this phrase as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “Now it was two days before the beginning of the Passover and the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast. The chief priests and the scribes were seeking”
14:1 ve8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες, ἀποκτείνωσιν 1 Here, both uses of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could seize Jesus by deceit and kill him”
14:1 qtym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποκτείνωσιν 1 These leaders did not have the authority to execute Jesus themselves. Rather, they were hoping to get others to kill him. Alternate translation: “they might cause Jesus to be put to death” or “they could have Jesus killed”
14:2 em4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔλεγον γάρ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to “the chief priests and the scribes” mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “For the chief priests and the scribes were saying to one another”
14:2 fk19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ 1 The phrase **Not during the festival** refers to not arresting Jesus during the festival. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We must not arrest him during the festival” or “We should not arrest him during the festival”
14:3 owfp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν Βηθανίᾳ, ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ 1 Both uses of the pronoun **he** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And Jesus being in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, Jesus reclining to eat”
14:3 bf84 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ 1 The word **Simon** is the name of a man. This man previously had leprosy but no longer had this disease. If this man had still had leprosy, he would have been considered ceremonially unclean in this society and would not have been allowed to enter the presence of people who did not have leprosy. This is a different man than Simon Peter and Simon the Zealot. Alternate translation: “Simon, the man who formerly had leprosy”
14:3 sh4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κατακειμένου αὐτοῦ 1 In this culture, the manner of eating at a feast or dinner party was to lie on a couch and prop oneself up with the left arm on some pillows. Alternate translation: “while he is lying on a banqueting couch to eat”
14:3 nl8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλάβαστρον 1 The word **alabaster** is the name of a soft, white stone. People stored precious and valuable items in jars made from alabaster. Alternate translation: “a jar made of soft, white stone”
14:3 hk2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μύρου & πολυτελοῦς 1 This **oil** had fragrant additives. To make a themselves have a nice smell, people would rub the oil on themselves or sprinkle their clothing with it. Alternate translation: “of expensive oil with perfume in it”
14:3 fqa9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς 1 The **perfumed oil** was made from the roots of a **nard** plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” If your readers would not be familiar with **nard** plants, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of highly valued scented oil made from spikenard roots” or “containing costly perfumed oil distilled from the nard roots”
14:3 rw4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession μύρου, νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτελοῦς 1 In this phrase, the second occurrence of the word **of** is used to describe **perfumed oil** that is “made from” **very precious pure nard**. If this use of the possessive **of** would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “containing very precious perfumed oil of pure nard”
14:4 v57p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη τοῦ μύρου γέγονεν? 1 These people are using a rhetorical question to emphasize that they thought the perfumed oil should not have been poured on Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This woman wasted that perfumed oil!”
14:4 g9qw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰς τί 1 Mark’s quotation is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “For what reason”
14:4 gjmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μύρου 1 See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md).
14:5 xfzs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ μύρον 1 See how you translated the phrase **perfumed oil** in [14:3](../14/03.md).
14:5 y113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠδύνατο & τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραθῆναι 1 Mark wants to show his readers that those present were mainly concerned about money. If your readers would not understand this use of the passive form here, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we could have sold this perfume” or “she could have sold this perfume”
14:5 t4p8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney δηναρίων τριακοσίων 1 See how you translated the word **denarii** in [6:37](../06/37.md).
14:5 h62k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Here, the adjective **poor** is being used as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the money given to people who are poor”
14:5 k83q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δοθῆναι τοῖς πτωχοῖς 1 Here, the word **given** refers to giving the money which could be made from the sale of the perfumed oil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:6 r9wt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί αὐτῇ κόπους παρέχετε? 1 With the question **Why are you causing trouble for her?**, Jesus is not asking for information, but rather, he is using the question form here to rebuke the guests who are troubling this woman regarding what she has done for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not trouble her!”
14:6 f4yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καλὸν ἔργον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **work**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST.
14:7 tc3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς πτωχοὺς 1 See how you translated the phrase **the poor** in [14:5](../14/05.md). Alternate translation: “people who are poor”
14:9 ysc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “wherever my followers preach the gospel”
14:9 ljh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη, λαληθήσεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “his followers” will be the ones doing it. Alternate translation: “my followers will speak also of what she has done”
14:9 u2ar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μνημόσυνον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **remembrance**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST, or you can express the same idea in another way that is natural in your language.
14:10 br8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδας Ἰσκαριὼθ 1 See how you translated the name **Judas Iscariot** in [Mark 3:19](../mrk/03/19.md).
14:10 tq5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md).
14:10 z71f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς 1 **Judas** did not deliver Jesus to the **chief priests** yet. Rather, he went to make such arrangements with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in order to arrange with them that he would hand Jesus over to them”
14:10 u2ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus”
14:11 kzk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες 1 It may be helpful to your readers to state explicitly what the chief priests **heard**. Alternate translation: “But the chief priests, when they heard that Judas Iscariot was willing to betray Jesus to them”
14:11 m4il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι 1 Mark is speaking of money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives money its value. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to pay money to Judas for doing this”
14:11 f7ek rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐζήτει 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Judas Iscariot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Judas Iscariot was seeking”
14:11 jrym rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The second occurrence of the pronoun **him** in this verse refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:12 vxax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 This was the **first day** of the seven-day festival described in [14:1](../14/01.md). You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “on the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes”
14:12 bel5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα 1 Jesus’ disciples are using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover** to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”
14:13 suny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual αὐτοῖς & ὑμῖν 1 Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural.
14:13 a7xg rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κεράμιον ὕδατος 1 Here, **pitcher of water** means not a small serving **pitcher**, but a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here.
14:14 i344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “tell the owner of the house that the Teacher wants to know where the guest room is where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples”
14:14 q3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 Jesus is telling these two disciples to use the name of this part of the festival, **the Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”
14:15 jlci rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀνάγαιον μέγα 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal.
14:15 x3zk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον 1 The word **furnished** is a passive verbal form. If your language does not use such forms, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “one he has furnished and made ready”
14:15 k4t7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, when Jesus says **us**, he is referring to himself and his disciples, including the two he is addressing here, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms.
14:16 wkh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 Mark is using the name of this part of the festival, **the Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal”
14:17 i1q1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express explicitly to where Jesus and his disciples came. Alternate translation: “he comes with the Twelve to the house”
14:17 t0q5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχεται 1 Your language may say “goes” rather than **comes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he goes”
14:19 layt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἤρξαντο λυπεῖσθαι 1 The pronoun **They** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The disciples began to be sorrowful”
14:19 v3a1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἷς κατὰ εἷς 1 The phrase **one by one** is an idiom meaning “one at a time.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “one at a time”
14:19 f13p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μήτι 1 The phrase **Surely not** is the ULT’s translation of the negative Greek word that Mark used. The Greek word that Mark used is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language.
14:20 n1tv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἷς τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “He is one of the twelve of you”
14:20 htn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον 1 Part of the Passover meal involved **dipping** bread into a flavored sauce called haroseth sauce. Mark assumes that his readers will know this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “dipping his bread into the bowl with me”
14:21 cif4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ; οὐαὶ δὲ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “For I, the Son of Man, depart just as it has been written about me, but woe to that man by whom I am handed over”
14:21 q5l3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses the word **departs** to refer to his death. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die just as it has been written about him”
14:21 hl6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here, Mark uses **it has been written** to mean that it is prophesied in the Old Testament Scriptures. Mark assumes that his readers will understand this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “just as it has been written in the Scriptures”
14:21 b13q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “people” did it. Alternate translation: “men inspired by God have written”
14:21 f51n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who hands him over” or, if you decided to use the first person, “who hands me over”
14:21 ct78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 You can state this more directly. Alternate translation: “who hands over the Son of Man”
14:22 ne53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 The term **bread** refers to a loaf of bread, which is a lump of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. The **bread** referred to here was a flat loaf of unleavened **bread** that was eaten as part of the Passover meal. Alternate translation: “a loaf of bread”
14:22 ukuc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄρτον 1 Since Jews did not eat **bread** made with yeast during this festival, this bread would not have had any yeast in it and it would have been flat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread”
14:22 oqv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐλογήσας 1 Mark assumes that his readers will know that the phrase **having blessed {it}** means that Jesus prayed to God before they ate the bread. Jewish people would have known that at the beginning of the Passover meal the host would begin the meal by praying a prayer of praise to God for the bread. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and having prayed and given thanks to God for it” or “and having prayed a prayer of praise to God for it”
14:22 ula2 ἔκλασεν 1 Jesus may have divided the loaf of **bread** into many pieces, as the UST says, or he may have divided it into two pieces and given those to the apostles to divide among themselves. If possible, use an expression in your language that would apply to either situation.
14:22 amg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς 1 The implication of the phrase **and gave {it} to them** is that Jesus **gave** the bread to the disciples to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and gave it to them to eat”
14:22 adb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate the phrase **This is my body**. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This represents my body” (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My body is really present in this bread”
14:23 u6rc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche λαβὼν ποτήριον 1 Here, **cup** is a metonym for wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken the cup of wine”
14:24 q5hn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν 1 In the Hebrew culture, covenants were customarily ratified through animal sacrifices that involved shedding the **blood** of the animals. Here Jesus is likely alluding to that practice in light of his impending sacrificial death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which ratifies the covenant, and my blood is being poured out for many people”
14:24 nj85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν 1 The phrase **of the** introduces the purpose for Jesus shedding his **blood**. Jesus is stating that the purpose for him shedding his blood is to establish the new **covenant**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose. Alternate translation: “This is my blood which is being poured out for many for the purpose of establishing God’s covenant” or “This is my blood which is being poured out for many for the purpose of making God’s covenant with his people”
14:24 hs24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου τῆς διαθήκης, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate the phrase **This is my blood**. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This wine represents my blood which establishes the covenant, and it is my blood which I will pour out for many” (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many, is really present in this wine”
14:24 pt5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ὑπὲρ πολλῶν 1 Jesus is referring to the way his **blood** is going to be **poured out** when he dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which I will pour out for many people”
14:25 mxwn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ὅτι οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ πίω ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου, ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ὅταν αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν 1 The phrase **certainly not** and the phrase **any longer** are both negative phrases, and therefore, this is a double negative. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that you can know for certain that the next time I drink wine will be when I drink it new” or “that you could know for certain that I will only drink wine again when I drink it new”
14:25 t7ai rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου 1 Jesus is referring to the juice (which is fermented and becomes wine) that people squeeze from grapes that grow on grapevines as if it were the **fruit** or the grapes themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as modeled by the UST.
14:25 qyf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας 1 Here Jesus uses the term **day** to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language, as modeled by the UST.
14:25 y1pf αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν, ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The word **new** could be referring to: (1) Jesus, and therefore would mean “again” or “in a new way.” See the parallel account in [Luke 22:18](../luk/022/18.md) where Jesus seems to mean this. Alternate translation: “I drink it in a new way in the kingdom of God” or “I drink it anew in the kingdom of God” or “I drink it again when I celebrate the Passover after it is fulfilled when God’s kingdom is consummated” (2) the wine and thus would be referring to drinking a new type or quality of wine. Alternate translation: “I drink new wine”
14:25 ue3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [1:15](../01/15.md). If it would be helpful in your language to understand the abstract noun **kingdom**, you could express the idea behind it with a verb such as “rule” as modeled by the UST.
14:26 l996 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὑμνήσαντες 1 A **hymn** is a song or poem that is sung to praise God. The Jews would traditionally sing a psalm from Psalms 113–118 at the end of the Passover meal, so the **hymn** that Jesus and his disciples sang was likely one of these psalms. If your readers would not be familiar with a **hymn**, you could use the name for religious songs in your culture, if you have them, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “having sung a psalm” or “having sung a song of praise to God”
14:27 lty4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε 1 Here Jesus speaks as if his disciples were going to **stumble**. He means that they will reject and desert him because of what will happen to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You all will desert me” or “You all will run away from me”
14:27 gkb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 Here, Mark uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in God’s Word” or “it is written by Zechariah the prophet”
14:27 jp51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Zechariah” did it. Alternate translation: “regarding what would happen to the Messiah and his followers, Zechariah wrote”
14:27 qzzv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah the prophet wrote that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” or “because Zechariah the prophet predicted in the Scriptures that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered”
14:27 cv7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 Jesus is quoting a prophecy from ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)) in which the prophet Zechariah speaks of the Messiah as if he were a **shepherd** and of the Messiah’s followers as if they were **sheep**. Since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text.
14:27 w2az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea behind the phrase **the sheep will be scattered** in another way that is natural in your language. The phrase **the sheep will be scattered** does not necessarily imply that there is someone making the action of scattering happen, so try to translate this phrase in a way that simply shows that **the sheep will be scattered** without saying who will make the action happen. Alternate translation: “the sheep will run away in different directions”
14:28 dm1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγερθῆναί με 1 The phrase **raised up** means to having become alive again after having died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am made alive again”
14:28 qi4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God will do it. Alternate translation: “God raises me from the dead”
14:29 op1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντες 1 By using the word **all** in this context, the implication is that **Peter** is referring to “all the other disciples.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the other disciples”
14:29 j961 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλισθήσονται 1 See how you translated the phrase **will be caused to stumble** in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “leave you”
14:29 div5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐγώ 1 In the phrase **not I**, Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will not fall away” or “I will not forsake you”
14:30 i4g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι 1 See how you translated the similar phrase “rooster crowing” in [13:35](../13/35.md).
14:31 z9le rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡσαύτως & καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον 1 The phrase **they all also were speaking in the same manner** means that all of the disciples were saying the same thing that Peter said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:32 deg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἔρχονται 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus and his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:32 ni66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἔρχονται 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nYour language may say “went” rather than **come** or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” or “they go”
14:34 eyw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 By using the phrase **My soul**, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST.
14:34 krj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ψυχή μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST.
14:34 ic1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἕως θανάτου 1 Jesus is using the phrase **to death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **to death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death”
14:35 wc6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παρέλθῃ & ἡ ὥρα 1 Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models.
14:35 gj74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the **hour** itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that **the hour might pass**, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer”
14:36 c11w rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Ἀββά 1 The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father** and which the Jews used to address their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers, who did not know Aramaic. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Mark does.
14:36 t9r2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ 1 The word **Father** is an important title for God.
14:36 jk6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Jesus is referring to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a **cup** of bitter-tasting liquid that he would have to drink. If your readers would not understand what **cup** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Please spare me from these sufferings”
14:36 s1r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The statement **Remove this cup from me** is an imperative, but it should be translated as a request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please spare me from these sufferings”
14:37 ja6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “finds the three disciples sleeping”
14:37 kp33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion Σίμων, καθεύδεις? οὐκ ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι? 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to rebuke **Peter** for falling asleep. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement, as modeled by the UST.
14:38 hi36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **temptation**, you can express the idea behind it with a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “pray, so that nothing will tempt you to sin”
14:38 zrp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν 1 The implications are that the disciples will soon experience the **temptation** to abandon Jesus in order to save themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “pray that when the Jewish leaders come to arrest me and you are tempted to try to save yourselves by running away or denying that you know me, you will not sin by doing that”
14:38 c1je rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ & πνεῦμα 1 Jesus is describing the inner part of a person (which includes their desires and will) by association with their **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated **spirit** in [2:8](../02/08.md), where **spirit** is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “The inner self” or “The inner person”
14:38 djxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & πνεῦμα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **spirit**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST.
14:38 gt2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρόθυμον 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me”
14:38 b909 ἡ & σὰρξ ἀσθενής 1 Here, the word **flesh** could: (1) include the meaning of both option 2 and option 3 and therefore **flesh** would refer to both the weakness of the human body and also to the deficiency of human desire and ability to do what is right. Alternate translation: “the body and your spiritual strength is weak” (2) refer to the human “body.” Alternate translation: “the body is weak” (3) refer to the sinful part of human nature that prefers to seek comfort and seek what it desires rather than obey God and do the things that please him. Alternate translation: “the sinful human nature is weak”
14:39 l9nj τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών 1 Alternate translation: “and said the same thing he had prayed the first time”
14:40 zkb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the three disciples’ eyes were weighed down, he found them sleeping”
14:40 bgyj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in a way that would make that clear in your language. Alternate translation: “the three disciples”
14:40 vwlx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** indicates that what follows is the reason that Jesus found the disciples sleeping. Use a natural way in your language to show this connection. Alternate translation: “because”
14:40 ht2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι 1 The phrase **their eyes were weighed down** is an idiom meaning “they were very tired.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they were very sleepy” or “they were very tired”
14:40 hayg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἦσαν & αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tiredness had caused their eyes to be weighed down” or “their sleepiness had caused their eyes to be weighed down”
14:41 x7qd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the third time** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he comes yet again”
14:41 jo0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, and John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning in a way that would make that clear in your language. Alternate translation: “to his three disciples”
14:41 lw7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to rebuke his disciples for falling asleep and resting. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way, as modeled by the UST.
14:41 wxmq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπέχει 1 The phrase **It is enough** most likely refers to the apostles sleeping. They need to wake up and prepare for what is about tot happen. Alternate translation: “It is enough sleep” or “That is enough sleep”
14:41 ae53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα 1 See how you translated the term **hour** in [13:11](../13/11.md) where it is used with the same figurative sense. Alternate translation: “The time has come”
14:41 msb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 **Behold** is an exclamation word that communicates that the listeners should pay attention. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this, as modeled by the UST.
14:41 h5u5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man** Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST.
14:41 eg9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παραδίδοται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone is about to hand over the Son of Man into the hands of the sinners”
14:41 uyzf παραδίδοται 1 See how you translated the phrase “betrayed him” in [3:19](../03/19.md), where it is used with the same meaning as it is here.
14:41 mcns rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 Here, **hands** is a metonym for control. See how you translated **hands** in [9:31](../09/31.md), where it is used with the same figurative sense. Alternate translation: “into the control of the sinners” or “into the custody of the sinners”
14:43 ytk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential εὐθὺς 1 See how you translated the word **immediately** in [1:10](../01/10.md).
14:43 nz4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../03/16.md).
14:44 r9cp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δεδώκει δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν σύσσημον αὐτοῖς λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀπάγετε ἀσφαλῶς 1 To help his readers understand what happens next, Mark provides this background information about how Judas had arranged his betrayal of Jesus with the Jewish leaders. Here Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce the background information which he gives in the rest of this verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Judas, who was going to hand Jesus over, gave this signal to those who were going to arrest Jesus. Judas said, ‘Whomever I may kiss, he it is. Seize him and lead him away securely’”
14:44 bvwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:44 bzj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν 1 The phrase **the one handing him over** refers to Judas. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:44 lsh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτός ἐστιν 1 The phrase **is he** refers to Jesus, the man that Judas was going to identify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is the one you should arrest”
14:46 gszh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν 1 Here, **laid hands on** is an idiom which means to take hold of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “took hold of Jesus and seized him in order to take him into custody”
14:46 y5qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐπέβαλαν τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν 1 The phrases, **laid hands on him** and **seized him** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine these phrases into one. Alternate translation: “seized Jesus” or “seized him” or “took hold of Jesus in order to arrest him”
14:48 eq25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με? 1 Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here as an emphatic way to rebuke the crowd. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “It is ridiculous that you come here to seize me with swords and clubs as if I were a robber!”
14:48 djp0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξήλθατε 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “have you gone out”
14:49 my05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Only priests were allowed to enter the temple building, so by saying **the temple**, Jesus means the temple courtyard. He is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:49 t9d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἵνα πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαί 1 Jesus’ words **But so that the Scriptures might be fulfilled** could: (1) be an ellipsis. If this is the case, then Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Matthew, in his parallel account in [Matt 26:56](../mat/26/56.md), supplies the words “all this has happened” between the words **But** and **so that**, so if this is an ellipsis these are the words that should be supplied. Alternate translation: “But all this has happened so that the Scriptures might be fulfilled” or “But, so that the Scriptures might be fulfilled, all this has happened” (2) instead be translated with an imperatival meaning as “But let the Scriptures be fulfilled.” Alternate translation: “But let the Scriptures be fulfilled”
14:49 d8wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Jesus implies that both God and sinful humans are acting to fulfill Scripture. God is intentionally acting to fulfill Scripture by leading Jesus to be willing to die and not flee from those trying to kill him. Sinful humans are also acting to fulfill Scripture even though they do not know that they are fulfilling what God had foretold in the Old Testament would happen to the Messiah. Because of this, if you must state who did the action, it would be best to translate this in a way that includes both or allows for both. Alternate translation: “God might fulfill through the acts of sinful men what has been foretold in the Scriptures”
14:50 pk0i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus”
14:50 gqz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔφυγον πάντες 1 The phrase **they all** refers to Jesus’ 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all Jesus’ disciples fled”
14:51 y5yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σινδόνα 1 The term **linen** refers to a high quality cloth made from the fibers of the flax plant. If you do not have **linen** in your region and/or your readers would be unfamiliar with this term, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a garment made of fine cloth” or “a garment made of good cloth”
14:53 ze1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπήγαγον τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state more explicitly what the phrase **they led Jesus away** means. Alternate translation: “they took Jesus from where they had arrested him”
14:54 bzg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ 1 Mark provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Peter followed Jesus, not getting too close”
14:54 l5gl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ μακρόθεν ἠκολούθησεν αὐτῷ, ἕως 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly why Peter **followed** Jesus **from a distance**. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Peter followed Jesus, staying some distance away so that he himself would not be recognized and arrested. He followed as far as going”
14:55 w23n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ ὅλον τὸ Συνέδριον 1 The word **Now** indicates that Mark is transitioning subjects and is now making **the chief priest** and the **Sanhedrin** the subject of the story instead of Peter. Use a natural way in your language for indicating this change in subjects. Alternate translation: “Now the men who were the chief priests and the entire Sanhedrin”
14:55 wlp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ μαρτυρίαν, εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν 1 The phrase **seeking testimony against** means that the chief priests and the Sanhedrin was seeking evidence against Jesus that they could bring to the Roman authorities and use it to accuse Jesus. This was not an official trial. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “were looking for evidence against Jesus so that they could have him put to death”
14:55 xp1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μαρτυρίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimony**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verbal phrase, as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the idea in some other way that is natural in your language.
14:55 yew5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὸ θανατῶσαι αὐτόν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb form such as “kill” or by expressing it some other way. Alternate translation: “so that they could have him killed”
14:56 quw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἴσαι αἱ μαρτυρίαι οὐκ ἦσαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **testimonies**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verbal phrase, as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the idea in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the word **testimonies** in [14:55](../14/55.md). Alternate translation: “but what they said against Jesus was not the same” or “but when they testified against Jesus, they contradicted each other” or “but when they testified against Jesus, their testimonies were not consistent with each other”
14:58 nbvu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος, ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, τὸν χειροποίητον, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “We heard him saying that he will destroy this temple made with hands and in three days will build another made without hands”
14:58 f82e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 The pronoun **We** refers to the people who falsely testified against Jesus. It does not include the people to whom they are speaking. If your language requires you to mark such forms, **We** would be exclusive here.
14:58 e94y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὸν χειροποίητον & ἀχειροποίητον 1 Here, Jesus uses the word **hands** to mean “men”. Jesus uses one part of a person to refer to the entire person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “made by men … made without man’s help” or “built by men … which will be built without man’s help”
14:58 hm5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἄλλον 1 By saying **another**, Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word “temple” from the context, as modeled by the UST.
14:58 v4ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἄλλον ἀχειροποίητον οἰκοδομήσω 1 By saying **another made without hands**, Jesus is referring to his body which God would bring back to life after **three days**. Because this is a direct quote of something that Jesus said, you should keep this information implicit in your translation.
14:59 atbz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ μαρτυρία 1 See how you translated the word **testimony** in [14:55](../14/55.md).
14:61 p8b5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὁ & ἐσιώπα, καὶ οὐκ ἀπεκρίνατο οὐδέν 1 The phrases **he was silent** and the phrase **did not answer** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus did not respond to any of the false accusations that were being made against him. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “he did not reply to anything that was said against him at all!” or “Jesus did not reply to a single thing that was said against him!”
14:61 o27t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ 1 Here, the title **the Blessed One** is a way of referring to God, so when the **high priest** asks Jesus if he is **the Son of the Blessed One**, he is asking Jesus if he is “the Son of God.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
14:62 yhhk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST.
14:62 d5qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως 1 To sit **at the right hand** of God is a symbolic act of receiving great honor and authority from God. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what **sitting at the right hand** of someone meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “sitting in a place of honor beside the all-powerful God” or “sitting in a place of honor next to the all-powerful God”
14:62 e1xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως 1 By using the phrase **of power**, Jesus is referring to God by association with his **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture that expresses power, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “sitting at the right hand of God” or “sitting at the right hand of God who is powerful”
14:63 jz48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ 1 In Jesus’ culture the act of tearing one’s clothing was a symbolic act done to show outrage or grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what tearing one’s clothes meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “having torn his tunics in outrage”
14:63 afd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων? 1 By saying **Why do we still have need of witnesses?**, the high priest is not asking for information but is using the question form here for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need any more people who will testify against this man!”
14:64 zwf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἠκούσατε τῆς βλασφημίας 1 This refers to what Jesus had said, which the high priest labelled as blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have heard the blasphemy he has spoken”
14:64 fu4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔνοχον εἶναι θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “and said he deserved to be executed”
14:65 d56t rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown περικαλύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ πρόσωπον 1 To **blindfold** someone means to tie a thick cloth around the middle of a person’s head to cover the eyes and prevent that person from seeing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain it with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to cover his eyes so that he could not see”
14:65 gvq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προφήτευσον 1 The implication is that God would have to tell Jesus who struck him, since Jesus had his eyes covered and could not see who was striking him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Prophesy and tell us who hit you” or “Speak words from God and tell us who hit you”
14:65 dg7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony προφήτευσον 1 The guards did not believe that Jesus was a real prophet and could **Prophesy**. When they demanded that Jesus should **Prophesy**, they were challenging him to do something they believed he could not do. They were only asking Jesus to **Prophesy** in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Prove that you really are a prophet and prophesy” or “Prophesy, if you really are a prophet” or “Prophesy and tell us who hit you, if you really are a prophet”
14:68 l5i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οὔτε οἶδα, οὔτε ἐπίσταμαι σὺ τί λέγεις 1 The phrase **Neither have I known** and the phrase **nor do I understand what you are saying** mean basically the same thing. Peter is using the repetition for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I surely do not know what you are talking about” or “I have no idea what you are talking about” or “I know nothing about this man from Nazareth whom you are speaking about”
14:69 v5kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Jesus and his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples”
14:70 qjgs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 See how you translated the phrase **from among them** in the previous verse.
14:71 ce6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναθεματίζειν 1 Here, the phrase **to curse** means “to invoke a curse from God upon oneself.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to invoke God’s curse upon himself if what he was saying was not true” or “to ask God to curse him if what he was saying was false” or “to invoke God’s destruction upon himself if what he was saying was false”
14:71 vihe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε 1 Here, the phrase **to swear** means “to subject oneself to an oath” or “to put oneself under an oath.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to swear by saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” or “to promise by making an oath and saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’”
14:72 i7u2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν & ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [13:35](../13/35.md).
14:72 ja3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ἐκ δευτέρου 1 The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **a second time** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once more”
14:72 cfno rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ῥῆμα 1 Mark is using the term **word** to describe what Jesus had said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “statement”
14:72 zr4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπιβαλὼν, ἔκλαιεν 1 The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **having broken down** could (1) be an idiom which means that Peter became overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having become overwhelmed with grief” or “having lost control of his emotions” (2) also be translated as “having thought of it” or “having reflected on it.” Alternate translation: “having thought of it, he was weeping” or “having reflected on it, he was weeping” or “having thought about what he had just done, he was weeping” (3) also be translated as “he began.” Alternate translation: “he began weeping” or “he started crying”
15:intro d823 0 # Mark 15 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”\n\nThe curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly, because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.\n\n### The tomb\n\nThe tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Sarcasm\n\nThe soldiers were insulting Jesus when they put a “purple robe” on him and placed a “crown of thorns” on his head (See Mark 15:17) and said, “Hail, King of the Jews” (See Mark 15:18) and bent their knees and bowed down to him (See Mark 15:19). These actions were symbolic of things that people would do to a king, but the soldiers did not really believe that Jesus was a king. By pretending that they thought Jesus was a king, and by putting a “crown of thorns” on Jesus’ head instead of a regular crown, and by “striking his head with a staff and spitting on him” (See Mark 15:19) the soldiers showed that they did not believe that Jesus was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Golgotha\n\nThe word “Golgotha” is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them it meant “Place of a Skull.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?\n\nThis is an Aramaic phrase. Mark transliterates the sounds of this phrase by writing them with Greek letters. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant “My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
15:1 xz7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν 1 The Jewish religious leaders commanded that Jesus should be **bound** but did not bind him themselves. It would have been the guards who actually bound Jesus and **led {him} away**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this in your translation, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then the guards bound him and led him away”
15:2 kn7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ λέγει 1 Together the two words **answering** and **says** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “responding to him, says”
15:2 dh6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σὺ λέγεις 1 **You say {it}** is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what Pilate has said is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is as you say”
15:3 b9sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background καὶ κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς πολλά 1 Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the chief priests were accusing Jesus of many things”
15:3 ue18 κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά 1 Alternate translation: “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many wrong things”
15:4 s2as οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? 1 Alternate translation: “Are you not going to respond to anything they have said?”
15:5 way9 ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη 1 Alternate translation: “But Jesus made no further reply”
15:6 ul19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background κατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν, ἀπέλυεν αὐτοῖς ἕνα δέσμιον, ὃν παρῃτοῦντο 1 The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line as Mark shifts to telling background information about Pilate’s tradition of releasing a prisoner at feasts. Mark is providing background information in this verse to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “It was Pilate’s custom to release to them a prisoner of their choice at the festival”
15:7 pdy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 The word **Now** is used here to mark a continuation of the break in the main story line which began in the preceding verse. Mark introduces more background information, this time about Barabbas, to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “And”
15:7 lx8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λεγόμενος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who bore the name”
15:7 wvzq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδεμένος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that “the Roman authorities” had soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “whom the Roman soldiers had bound”
15:7 iofn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns φόνον πεποιήκεισαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **murder**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form, as modeled by the UST.
15:8 a4xb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἀναβὰς 1 Your language may say “having gone up” rather than **having come up** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone up”
15:9 o3j4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς λέγων 1 When translating the phrase **answered them, saying** see how you translated the similar phrase “answering him, says” in [15:2](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “responded to them”
15:10 i4ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἐγίνωσκεν γὰρ ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Mark provides this background information about why Jesus was **handed over** in order to help readers understand why Pilate asked the question in [15:9](../15/09.md). Mark introduces the background information in this verse with the word **For**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
15:10 u647 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 The **chief priests** envied Jesus because so many people were following him and becoming his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. If you decide to express this information explicitly, consider beginning a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the chief priests were envious of Jesus because so many people were becoming his disciples. Pilate knew that this was why they had handed him over” or “the chief priests were envious of Jesus’ popularity among the people. This is why they had handed him over”
15:11 y5w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 Mark speaks of the **chief priests** as if they had **stirred** a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the **chief priests** encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If your readers would not understand what **stirred up** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “encouraged the crowd” or “incited the crowd”
15:11 pvu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces what the **chief priests stirred up the crowd** to request of Pilate. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:12 keq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated the similar statement in [15:9](../15/09.md). Alternate translation: “Pilate again responded to them, saying”
15:12 p94y πάλιν 1 Mark uses the word **again** here because Pilate had already spoken to them regarding this matter in [15:9](../15/09.md). Use a natural form in your language for expressing the meaning of **again** as it is used here.
15:12 vlm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί οὖν ποιήσω λέγετε τὸν Βασιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων? 1 Pilate uses the word **therefore** because, as [15:11](../15/11.md) indicates, the chief priests had “stirred up the crowd” to request that Pilate “release Barabbas” to them. So Pilate is asking what he should **therefore** do with Jesus if Barabbas is the prisoner to be released at their request. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If I release Barabbas, what then should I do with the one you call the King of the Jews”
15:13 n6jb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σταύρωσον αὐτόν 1 The Romans executed some criminals by nailing them to a wooden beam with a crossbar and setting the beam upright so that the criminals would slowly suffocate. That was what it meant to **Crucify** someone. Alternate translation: “Nail him to a cross! Execute him!”
15:13 nwms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative σταύρωσον αὐτόν 1 Here, the word **Crucify** is an imperative, but since the crowd cannot command Pilate to do this, you could translate the phrase **Crucify him** as an expression of what they want. Alternate translation: “We want you to nail him to a cross to execute him”
15:15 fwg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit φραγελλώσας 1 Mark assumes that his readers will know that Pilate did not actually flog **Jesus**, and he assumes his readers will know that Pilate ordered his soldiers to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly, as modeled by the UST.
15:15 yzn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown φραγελλώσας 1 If your readers would not be familiar with this form of punishment, you could explain explicitly what flogging was. Flogging was a Roman penalty in which they whipped a person with a whip to which were attached pieces of bone and metal to increase the whip’s capacity to do harm to the person being flogged. Alternate translation: “having whipped Jesus with a whip with pieces of bone and metal attached to it” or “having whipped Jesus with a whip to which was attached pieces of bone and metal”
15:15 w1sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal καὶ παρέδωκεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, ἵνα σταυρωθῇ 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. With the phrase **so that he might be crucified**, Mark is stating the purpose for which Pilate **handed Jesus over**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and after having Jesus flogged, he handed Jesus over to them in order that they might crucify him”
15:15 r9id rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σταυρωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that Pilate’s “soldiers” did it. Alternate translation: “his soldiers might take him away and crucify him”
15:16 eg6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον 1 By clarifying **(that is, the Praetorium)**, Mark explains that **the courtyard** is part of the official residence of the Roman governor. This background information is given to help his readers understand exactly what he means by using the word **courtyard**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “which is, the Praetorium”
15:16 lb2x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πραιτώριον 1 The **Praetorium** was where the Roman governor stayed when he was in Jerusalem and where the soldiers in Jerusalem lived. Mark assumes that his readers will know what the **Praetorium** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the palace where the governor and his soldiers lived” or “the Roman governor’s residence”
15:16 b5gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν 1 Mark assumes that his readers will know that a **cohort** was a unit of Roman soldiers. A **cohort** normally numbered around 600 men but could sometimes refer to a number as small as 200 men. Here, by saying **the whole cohort**, Mark most likely means all the soldiers from the **cohort** who were on duty at that time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that a **cohort** was a unit of Roman soldiers. Additionally, you could also say explicitly that it was only the soldiers who were on duty who were called together, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “the whole unit of soldiers” or “the whole unit of soldiers who were on duty there”
15:17 tn33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνδιδύσκουσιν αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ περιτιθέασιν αὐτῷ πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον 1 In Roman culture, a **purple robe** and a **crown** were worn by kings. The soldiers put a **crown** made from **thorns** and a **purple robe** on Jesus in order to mock him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. It may be helpful to your readers to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “they put a purple robe on him and placed on his head a crown that they had made by twisting thorns together. They did these things in order to mock him by pretending that they believed he really was a king”
15:17 ly5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πορφύραν 1 The word **purple** denotes a color. If your readers would be unfamiliar with the color **purple**, you could use the closest equivalent color that your readers would be familiar with such as “crimson” or “scarlet” (“crimson” and “scarlet” are two different names for the same color) since Matthew records in [Matt 27:28](../mat/27/28.md) that the color of the robe was “scarlet.” The fact that Matthew and Mark use a different color to describe the color of the same robe probably means that its color closely resembled both “scarlet” and **purple**. If your readers would be unfamiliar with these colors, you could use the closest equivalent color that they would be familiar with, such as “red” or “dark red.” Alternate translation: “dark red” or “red” or “crimson” or “scarlet”
15:17 xfk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πλέξαντες ἀκάνθινον στέφανον 1 Mark uses the word **thorns** to refer to small branches with **thorns** on them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having twisted it together from thorny branches, a crown”
15:18 ft1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἀσπάζεσθαι αὐτόν, Χαῖρε, Βασιλεῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 The word **Rejoice** was a common greeting, but the soldiers used this greeting in order to mock Jesus. They did not believe that Jesus was really the **King of the Jews**. They actually meant to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “to salute him by saying in a mocking manner: ‘Rejoice, King of the Jews’”
15:19 gz3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony καλάμῳ, καὶ 1 Matthew records in [Matt 27:19](../mat/27/19.md) that the soldiers placed a **reed** in Jesus’ “right hand” and that “they mocked him” by saying, “Hail, King of the Jews!” At this time in history, kings used scepters. The **reed** would have resembled a scepter, so the soldiers are using a **reed** here to mock Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Alternate translation: “with a reed that they were using as a pretend scepter, and they were”
15:19 muvw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐνέπτυον αὐτῷ 1 In this culture, the action of **spitting on** a person was a way to show thorough disgust. It expressed strong contempt for someone. If your readers would not understand the meaning of **spitting on** someone in this context and there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in place of this action.
15:19 a8a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τιθέντες τὰ γόνατα, προσεκύνουν αὐτῷ 1 The acts of **bending the knee** and **bowing down** were things normally done as a way of honoring kings. The soldiers actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their actions. These soldiers do not really believe that Jesus is a king, but rather, they are doing these things to express mockery. If it would be helpful in your language, you could provide a brief explanation. Also see the discussion about this idea in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “bending the knee, they were bowing down to him in order to mock him”
15:20 styv πορφύραν 1 See how you translated the word **purple** in [15:17](../15/17.md).
15:20 dp33 ἐξάγουσιν αὐτὸν 1 Alternate translation: “then they led him out of the city” or “required Jesus to carry his cross and then led Jesus out of the city” or “made Jesus carry his cross and led Jesus out of the city”
15:20 euk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus was **led** out, namely that **they might crucify him**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:21 cj4l ἀγγαρεύουσιν & ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 According to Roman law, a solider could force a man he came upon along the road to carry a load. In this case, they forced Simon to carry Jesus’ cross.
15:21 rtz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σίμωνα & Ἀλεξάνδρου & Ῥούφου 1 The words **Simon**, **Alexander**, and **Rufus** are the names of men.
15:21 n1oz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐρχόμενον 1 Your language may say “going” rather than **coming** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “going”
15:21 cyn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background τὸν πατέρα Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ῥούφου 1 The phrase **the father of Alexander and Rufus** is background information about the man whom the soldiers forced to carry Jesus’ cross. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
15:21 d3i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which **they pressed into service a certain passerby, Simon of Cyrene**, namely **so that** they could require him to **carry** Jesus’ **cross**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:22 w6c7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Γολγοθᾶν, τόπον ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπος 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe word **Golgotha** is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant **Place of a Skull**. In your translation you could spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning.
15:22 e49p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo Γολγοθᾶν & Κρανίου Τόπος 1 Matthew says in [Matt 27:33](../mat/27/33.md) that **Golgotha** was “a place called Golgotha,” so it is clear that this was the name of a location, but the reason why this place was called **Place of a Skull** is not known. It could have been called **Place of a Skull** because the appearance of this place resembled a skull or because it was the site of so many executions, in which case the name **Skull** is being used as metonymy to refer to death. Because the reason that this location was called **Place of a Skull** is unknown, you should translate this phrase in a way that allows for either meaning, as modeled by the ULT and UST.
15:22 m1dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST.
15:23 e9xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐσμυρνισμένον οἶνον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain that **myrrh** was a pain-relieving medicine. Alternate translation: “wine mixed with a pain-relieving medicine called myrrh” or “wine mixed with a pain-relieving drug called myrrh”
15:23 ld7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσμυρνισμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language.
15:23 r0xy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what was expected, that Jesus would drink the **wine having been mixed with myrrh**. Instead, Jesus refused to drink it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast.
15:24 s5m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown βάλλοντες κλῆρον ἐπ’ αὐτὰ 1 The term **lot** refers to an object with different markings on various sides that would be used to decide randomly among several possibilities. It would be tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with **a lot**, you could state that it was “something like dice,” as UST does. But if your readers would also not be familiar with dice, then you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “and the Roman soldiers gambled for them”
15:24 mn6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τίς τί ἄρῃ 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “to decide who would take what”
15:25 dzbr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background δὲ 1 Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce the background information of the time of day when Jesus was crucified. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “And”
15:25 q1ze rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὥρα τρίτη 1 The Jews and the Romans divided the day into a 12-hour time period and the night into a 12-hour period. Here the phrase **the third hour** refers to **the third hour** of the day, which was approximately three hours after sunrise. Here, **third** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the third hour** as “nine o’clock in the morning”, as modeled by the UST, since this is what time the phrase **the third hour** is referring to. Alternately, you can express the meaning of the phrase **the third hour** in some other way that is natural in your culture. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock in the morning”
15:26 cbx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιγεγραμμένη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as modeled by the UST.
15:26 c0zf ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 See how you translated the phrase “the King of the Jews” in [15:2](../15/02.md).
15:27 mgf3 ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν καὶ ἕνα ἐξ εὐωνύμων αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “one robber on his right side and one robber on his left side” or “one on a cross on the right side of him and one on a cross on the left side of him”
15:28 itjz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Καὶ ἐπληρώθη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγουσα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “And by crucifying Jesus with robbers, they fulfilled the scripture that says”
15:28 d5g8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “And he was reckoned by God and by people as being with the wicked”
15:29 v8nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν 1 The people’s action of **wagging their heads** at Jesus showed their disdain for him and that they disapproved of him. If your readers would not understand what it means to shake one’s head at someone in this context and there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation.
15:29 a7ft rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations οὐὰ 1 **Aha** is an exclamation word that communicates triumph, usually over an enemy. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Take that!”
15:29 hy37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ καταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ οἰκοδομῶν ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις 1 The people refer to Jesus by what he earlier prophesied that he would do. Alternate translation: “You who said you would destroy the temple and rebuild it in three days”
15:31 n13x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἄλλους ἔσωσεν 1 Here, the Jewish leaders are using irony. They do not really believe that Jesus **saved** other people. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He supposedly saved other people”
15:31 o9qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄλλους ἔσωσεν 1 In context, the Jewish leaders are implicitly referring to how Jesus **saved others** by healing their diseases, releasing them from demon-possession, and helping saving them from other physical problems. They did not think that Jesus saved them from sin or divine judgment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “He supposedly saved other people by doing miracles for them”
15:32 t1vm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω 1 Here, the Jewish leaders are using irony. They do not really believe that Jesus is **the Christ, the King of Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “He calls himself the Christ and the King of the Israelites. So let him come down” or “If he really is the Christ and the King of the Israelite people, he should come down”
15:32 q5qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ὁ Χριστὸς, ὁ Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραὴλ καταβάτω νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν 1 The Jewish leaders are using a hypothetical situation since they do not believe that Jesus actually has the power to come down from the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate plainly that the Jewish leaders are using this as a hypothetical situation. Use whatever form in your language would be most natural to communicate this. Alternate translation: “If he really is the Christ, the King of Israel, let him come down now from the cross. Then we will see and believe that he is the Christ and the King of Israel”
15:32 f8yw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which they said that Jesus should **come down now from the cross**, which was in order that **they might see and might believe**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
15:32 r6c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πιστεύσωμεν 1 The phrase **might believe** means to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe in him”
15:32 dcb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνεσταυρωμένοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies in [15:20](../15/20.md) that “soldiers” are the ones who are crucifying Jesus and the two other men. Alternate translation: “whom the soldiers had crucified”
15:33 q1gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὥρας ἕκτης 1 The Jews and the Romans divided the day into a 12-hour time period and the night into a 12-hour period. Here, the phrase **the sixth hour** refers to the sixth hour of the day, often called “twelve o’clock” or “noon” in some parts of the world. The **the sixth hour** of the day was approximately six hours after sunrise. The term **sixth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the sixth hour** as “noon”, as modeled by the UST, or as “twelve o’clock.” Alternately, you can translate it in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in [15:25](../15/25.md). Alternate translation: “the hour of twelve o’clock”
15:33 m67d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης 1 The phrase **the ninth hour** refers to “three o’clock in the afternoon”, approximately nine hours after sunrise. The term **ninth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **the ninth hour** as “three o’clock in the afternoon,” as modeled by the UST, or in some other way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the phrase “the third hour” in [15:25](../15/25.md), and the phrase “the sixth hour” earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “until three hours after noon” or “for three hours”
15:34 r6tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τῇ ἐνάτῃ ὥρᾳ 1 See how you translated the phrase **the ninth hour** in [15:33](../15/33.md).
15:34 azt0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐβόησεν & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 The expression **cried out with a loud voice** is an idiom that means Jesus raised the volume of his **voice**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cried out loudly”
15:34 ls1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει? ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, ὁ Θεός μου, ὁ Θεός μου, εἰς τί ἐγκατέλιπές με 1 Jesus statement **Eloi, Eloi, lema sabachthani** is an Aramaic phrase. Jesus is quoting from [Psalm 22:1](../psa/22/01.md). Mark uses Greek letters to express the sounds of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant **My God, my God, why did you forsake me**. In your translation you could spell this phrase the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning.
15:35 apg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καί τινες τῶν παρεστηκότων, ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly that some of the people standing by misunderstood what Jesus said, as modeled by the UST.
15:37 xkpk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀφεὶς φωνὴν μεγάλην 1 See how you translated the phrase “cried out with a loud voice” in [15:34](../15/34.md).
15:37 puak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἐξέπνευσεν 1 Mark is referring to death in a polite way by using the word **expired**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “he stopped breathing” or “he died”
15:38 sk3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσθη εἰς δύο 1 See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of the symbolic significance of this action.
15:38 t71k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ 1 Mark assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to **the curtain** that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of the **temple**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the curtain in front of the Most Holy Place”
15:38 ni8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσχίσθη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the phrase **was split** with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God split”
15:39 hue4 ἐξέπνευσεν 1 See how you translated the word **expired** in [15:37](../15/37.md).
15:39 nqv8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς Θεοῦ 1 The title **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus.
15:40 gkgi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη 1 If it would be more natural in your language to first give background information about these women before listing individual names, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to the end of verse 41. You would then present the combined verses as 40–41, as modeled by the UST.
15:40 zc9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ & Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ 1 Because **Mary** was a very common name at this time and because Mark refers to two different women with the name **Mary** in this verse, he provides this background information to help readers know to which **Mary** he is referring in each case. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
15:40 z5ra rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ 1 The word **James** is the name a man. This man is probably referred to as **the younger** here to distinguish him from other men named **James**, since he is not James the brother of Jesus, James son of Zebedee, or James son of Alphaeus.
15:40 wdrq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰωσῆ 1 The word **Joses** is the name a man. This **Joses** was not the same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in [6:3](../06/03.md).
15:40 qa0q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σαλώμη 1 The word **Salome** is the name of a woman.
15:41 j15z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background αἳ ὅτε ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ 1 Mark uses the statement **who, when he was in Galilee, were following him and serving him** to give his readers background information about the relationship that the three women mentioned in [15:40](../15/40.md) had with Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
15:41 a3qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go αἱ συναναβᾶσαι 1 **Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “gone up” rather than **come up** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone up with”
15:42 ekbl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 If it would be more natural in your language to introduce Joseph of Arimathea and what he did before giving the reason for what he did, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to verse 43 and taking the information about Joseph of Arimathea from verse 43 and placing it after the phrase **And when evening had already come** in this verse. You would then present the combined verses as 42–43, as modeled by the UST.
15:42 lxm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nMark provides this background information about what day it was to help readers understand what happens in this episode. God commanded in Deuteronomy 21:22–23 that any person who was put to death by hanging on a wooden object should be buried on the same day that they were put to death. Because of this and the fact that **evening already having come** and because the following day was the **Sabbath**, on which Jews did not work, the people involved wanted to bury Jesus’ body quickly. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
15:42 ug97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 The phrase **the Day of Preparation** refers to the day on which Jews would make preparations for the **Sabbath** so that they would not have to do work on the **Sabbath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly what the Day of Preparation was. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Day of Preparation, on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath. The Day of Preparation is the day before the Sabbath”
15:43 xn8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον 1 Mark places the phrase **having come** after he gives the background information about Joseph in order to provide emphasis and to help introduce Joseph to the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Joseph of Arimathea was a respected member of the council who also was himself waiting for the kingdom of God. He boldly came to Pilate”
15:43 wgz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας 1 The word **Joseph** is the name of a man, and the word **Arimathea** is the name of the place that he is from.
15:43 u7ll rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Mark provides this background information about **Joseph** to help readers understand why Joseph would ask Pilate for Jesus’ body and why Pilate might have granted his request. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.
15:43 zvw4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ᾐτήσατο τὸ σῶμα τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The reason that **Joseph** asked Pilate **for the body of Jesus** was so that he could bury it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “asked for permission to get the body of Jesus in order to bury it” or “asked that he be given the body of Jesus so that he could bury it”
15:46 eb9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθελὼν αὐτὸν, ἐνείλησεν τῇ σινδόνι, καὶ ἔθηκεν αὐτὸν ἐν μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημένον ἐκ πέτρας; καὶ προσεκύλισεν λίθον ἐπὶ τὴν θύραν τοῦ μνημείου 1 Mark assumes that his readers will know that Joseph probably had help from other people when he took Jesus’ body down from the cross, prepared it for the tomb, laid it in the tomb, and rolled a stone against the entrance to the tomb in order to close it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Joseph and the people who helped him took Jesus’ body down, wrapped the body in the linen cloth, and put it in a tomb that was cut from a rock. And they rolled a stone against the door of the tomb”
15:46 g9hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἦν λελατομημένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies that a “person” or several “people” had cut the tomb from a rock. Alternate translation: “someone had previously cut”
15:47 m782 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰωσῆτος 1 See how you translated the name **Joses** in [6:3](../06/03.md). This **Joses** was not the same person as the younger brother of Jesus mentioned in [6:3](../06/03.md), although they share the same name.
15:47 jvz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 See how you translated **Mary Magdalene** in [15:40](../15/40.md).
15:47 v3wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τέθειται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can state it in another way that is natural in your language.
16:intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The tomb\n\nThe tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### A young man dressed in a white robe\n\nMatthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1–2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md))
16:1 p61n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 By using the phrase **the Sabbath having passed**, Mark is explaining that the Jewish day of rest, called the **Sabbath**, had ended and that it was now permissible, according to Jewish law, for these women to buy spices. The phrase **the Sabbath having passed** does not mean that the actual day on which the **Sabbath** occurred was over. The Jewish **Sabbath** ended at sunset on Saturday evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the sun had set on Saturday evening”
16:1 cw1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἡ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nSee how you translated **Mary Magdalene** in [15:40](../15/40.md).
16:1 m7qt rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰακώβου 1 The word **James** is the name a man. Much as in [15:40](../15/40.md), this man is probably referred to as **the younger** to distinguish him from other men named **James**, since he is not James the brother of Jesus, James son of Zebedee, or James son of Alphaeus.
16:1 nmvs rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σαλώμη 1 See how you translated the name **Salome** in [15:40](../15/40.md).
16:1 zrcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. The women **bought spices** for the purpose of anointing Jesus’ body with them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that”
16:2 qcmt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ 1 Here, the word **first** refers to the “first day” of the week. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day”
16:4 kld9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can translate it in another way that is natural in your language.
16:5 oaqk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo νεανίσκον 1 Here, the **young man** is actually an angel who looked like a young man. See the discussion of this under the General Notes section for this chapter. You should translate the phrase **young man** as it appears in the ULT.
16:6 ie57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can translate it in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark implies in chapter 15 that Pilate’s “soldiers” did it. Alternate translation: “who Pilate’s soldiers crucified”
16:6 x9m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is implied that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead!” or “He has risen!”
16:7 x3u1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τῷ Πέτρῳ 1 The phrase **and Peter** is not making a distinction between **Peter** and the disciples by indicating that **Peter** is not part of the group of Jesus’ 12 **disciples**. Rather, the phrase **and Peter** is being used to emphasize that of all of the 12 disciples of Jesus, these women should take special care to tell Peter the information that follows this phrase. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and especially Peter”
16:7 axgu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes Πέτρῳ, ὅτι προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν; ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε, καθὼς εἶπεν ὑμῖν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “to Peter that he is going before them to Galilee and that they will see him there, just as he said to them”
16:8 dlji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξελθοῦσαι 1 Your language may say “come” rather than **gone** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having come out”
16:8 sh40 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **amazement**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “amazed.” Alternate translation: “for they were greatly amazed, and they trembled”
16:8 bdgb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἶχεν γὰρ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις 1 Here, the word **gripping** is an idiom which means “overcoming.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for they were overcome by trembling and amazement” or “for they were overcome with trembling and amazement”
See in Reader
